1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2: %
3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5: %
6: \def\texinfoversion{2012-03-11.15}
7: %
8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9: % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10: % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11: %
12: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
13: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
15: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
16: %
17: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
20: % General Public License for more details.
21: %
22: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23: % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
24: %
25: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
26: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
27: % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
28: %
29: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
30: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
31: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
32: % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
33: % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
34: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
35: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
36: %
37: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
38: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
39: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
40: %
41: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
42: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
43: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
44: % tex foo.texi
45: % texindex foo.??
46: % tex foo.texi
47: % tex foo.texi
48: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
49: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
50: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
51: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
52: %
53: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
54: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
55: % full Texinfo distribution.
56: %
57: % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
58:
59:
60: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
61:
62: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
63: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
64: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
65: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
66: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
67:
68: \chardef\other=12
69:
70: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
71: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
72: \let\+ = \relax
73:
74: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
75: \let\ptexb=\b
76: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
77: \let\ptexc=\c
78: \let\ptexcomma=\,
79: \let\ptexdot=\.
80: \let\ptexdots=\dots
81: \let\ptexend=\end
82: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
83: \let\ptexexclam=\!
84: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
85: \let\ptexgtr=>
86: \let\ptexhat=^
87: \let\ptexi=\i
88: \let\ptexindent=\indent
89: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
90: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
91: \let\ptexless=<
92: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
93: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
94: \let\ptexplus=+
95: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
96: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
97: \let\ptexslash=\/
98: \let\ptexstar=\*
99: \let\ptext=\t
100: \let\ptextop=\top
101: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
102:
103: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104: % starts a new line in the output.
105: \newlinechar = `^^J
106:
107: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
109: %
110: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
112: \else
113: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
114: \fi
115:
116: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
120: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
121: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
122: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
123: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
124: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
125: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
126: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
127: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
128: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
129: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
130: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
131: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
132: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
133: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
134: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
135: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
136: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
137: %
138: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
139: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
140: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
141: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
142: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
143: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
144: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
145: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
146: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
147: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
148: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
149: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
150: %
151: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
152: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
153: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
154: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
155: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
156:
157: % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
158: \chardef\spacecat = 10
159: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
160:
161: % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
162: \chardef\ampChar = `\&
163: \chardef\colonChar = `\:
164: \chardef\commaChar = `\,
165: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
166: \chardef\dotChar = `\.
167: \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
168: \chardef\hashChar = `\#
169: \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
170: \chardef\questChar = `\?
171: \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
172: \chardef\semiChar = `\;
173: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
174: \chardef\underChar = `\_
175:
176: % Ignore a token.
177: %
178: \def\gobble#1{}
179:
180: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
181: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
182:
183: % Hyphenation fixes.
184: \hyphenation{
185: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
186: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
187: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
188: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
189: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
190: spell-ing spell-ings
191: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
192: wide-spread wrap-around
193: }
194:
195: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
196: \newdimen\bindingoffset
197: \newdimen\normaloffset
198: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
199:
200: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
201: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
202: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
203: %
204: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
205:
206: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
207: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
208: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
209: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
210: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
211: %
212: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
213: \def\loggingall{%
214: \tracingstats2
215: \tracingpages1
216: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
217: \tracingparagraphs1
218: \tracingoutput1
219: \tracingmacros2
220: \tracingrestores1
221: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
222: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
223: \tracingscantokens1
224: \tracingifs1
225: \tracinggroups1
226: \tracingnesting2
227: \tracingassigns1
228: \fi
229: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
230: \errorcontextlines16
231: }%
232:
233: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
234: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
235: % after all.
236: %
237: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
238: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
239:
240: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
241: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
242: %
243: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
244: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
245: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
246: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
247: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
248: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
249:
250: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
251: %
252: \newif\ifcropmarks
253: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
254: %
255: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
256: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
257: %
258: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
259: \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
260: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
261: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
262:
263: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
264: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
265: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
266: %
267: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
268: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
269: %
270: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
271: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
272: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
273: % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
274: % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
275: % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
276: \def\domark{%
277: \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
278: \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
279: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
280: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
281: \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
282: \mark{%
283: \the\toks0 \the\toks2
284: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
285: \noexpand\else \the\toks8
286: }%
287: }
288: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
289: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
290: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
291: % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
292: % first @chapter.
293: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
294: \ifcase0\topmark\fi
295: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
296: }
297: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
298: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
299:
300: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
301: \def\lastchapterdefs{}
302: \def\lastsectiondefs{}
303: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
304: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
305: \def\lastcolordefs{}
306:
307: % Main output routine.
308: \chardef\PAGE = 255
309: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
310:
311: \newbox\headlinebox
312: \newbox\footlinebox
313:
314: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
315: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
316: \def\onepageout#1{%
317: \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
318: %
319: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
320: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
321: %
322: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
323: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
324: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
325: \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
326: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
327: \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
328: %
329: {%
330: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
331: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
332: % before the \shipout runs.
333: %
334: \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
335: \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
336: % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
337: % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
338: % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
339: % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
340: % it needs to be
341: % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
342: \shipout\vbox{%
343: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
344: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
345: %
346: \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
347: \hsize = \outerhsize
348: \vskip-\topandbottommargin
349: \vtop to0pt{%
350: \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
351: \nointerlineskip
352: \line{%
353: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
354: \hfill
355: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
356: }%
357: \vss}%
358: \vskip\topandbottommargin
359: \line\bgroup
360: \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
361: \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
362: \vbox\bgroup
363: \fi
364: %
365: \unvbox\headlinebox
366: \pagebody{#1}%
367: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
368: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
369: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
370: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
371: \vskip 24pt
372: \unvbox\footlinebox
373: \fi
374: %
375: \ifcropmarks
376: \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
377: \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
378: \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
379: \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
380: \vbox to0pt{\vss
381: \line{%
382: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
383: \hfill
384: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
385: }%
386: \nointerlineskip
387: \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
388: }%
389: \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
390: \fi
391: }% end of \shipout\vbox
392: }% end of group with \indexdummies
393: \advancepageno
394: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
395: }
396:
397: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
398:
399: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
400: {\catcode`\@ =11
401: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
402: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
403: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
404: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
405: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
406: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
407: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
408: }
409:
410: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
411: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
412: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
413: %
414: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
415: \def\nstop{\vbox
416: {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
417: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
418: \def\nsbot{\vbox
419: {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
420:
421: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
422: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
423: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
424: %
425: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
426: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
427: \def\argtorun{#2}%
428: \begingroup
429: \obeylines
430: \spaceisspace
431: #1%
432: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
433: }
434:
435: {\obeylines %
436: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
437: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
438: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
439: }%
440: }
441:
442: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
443: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
444: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
445:
446: % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
447: %
448: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
449: % @end itemize @c foo
450: % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
451: % by \finishparsearg.
452: %
453: \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
454: \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
455: \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
456: \def\temp{#3}%
457: \ifx\temp\empty
458: % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
459: \let\temp\finishparsearg
460: \else
461: \let\temp\argcheckspaces
462: \fi
463: % Put the space token in:
464: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
465: }
466:
467: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
468: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
469: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
470: % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
471: % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
472: % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
473: % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
474: %
475: % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
476: %
477: \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
478:
479: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
480: % is roughly equivalent to
481: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
482: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
483: %
484: % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
485: % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
486:
487: \def\parseargdef#1{%
488: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
489: }
490: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
491: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
492: \def#1##1%
493: }
494:
495: % Several utility definitions with active space:
496: {
497: \obeyspaces
498: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
499:
500: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
501: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
502: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
503: % should produce a line of output anyway.
504: %
505: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
506:
507: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
508: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
509: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
510: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
511: }
512:
513:
514: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
515:
516: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
517: %
518: % \envdef\foo{...}
519: % \def\Efoo{...}
520: %
521: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
522: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
523: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
524: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
525: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
526: %
527: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
528: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
529: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
530: % special case.)
531:
532:
533: % At run-time, environments start with this:
534: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
535: % initialize
536: \let\thisenv\empty
537:
538: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
539: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
540: \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
541:
542: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
543: \def\checkenv#1{%
544: \def\temp{#1}%
545: \ifx\thisenv\temp
546: \else
547: \badenverr
548: \fi
549: }
550:
551: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
552: \def\badenverr{%
553: \errhelp = \EMsimple
554: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
555: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
556: }
557: \def\inenvironment#1{%
558: \ifx#1\empty
559: outside of any environment%
560: \else
561: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
562: \fi
563: }
564:
565: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
566: % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
567: %
568: \parseargdef\end{%
569: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
570: \else
571: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
572: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
573: \csname E#1\endcsname
574: \endgroup
575: \fi
576: }
577:
578: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
579:
580:
581: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
582: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
583: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
584: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
585: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
586: {\catcode`@ = 11
587: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
588: % if the definition is written into an index file.
589: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
590: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
591: }
592:
593: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
594: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
595:
596: % @* forces a line break.
597: \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
598:
599: % @/ allows a line break.
600: \let\/=\allowbreak
601:
602: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
603: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
604:
605: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
606: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
607:
608: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
609: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
610:
611: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
612: %
613: \def\onword{on}
614: \def\offword{off}
615: %
616: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
617: \def\temp{#1}%
618: \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
619: \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
620: \else
621: \errhelp = \EMsimple
622: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
623: \fi\fi
624: }
625:
626: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
627: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
628: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
629: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
630:
631: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
632: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
633: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
634: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
635: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
636: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
637: % the text is small, which looks bad.
638: %
639: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
640: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
641: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
642: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
643: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
644: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
645: %
646: \newbox\groupbox
647: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
648: %
649: \envdef\group{%
650: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
651: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
652: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
653: \fi
654: \startsavinginserts
655: %
656: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
657: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
658: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
659: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
660: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
661: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
662: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
663: \comment
664: }
665: %
666: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
667: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
668: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
669: % above. But it's pretty close.
670: \def\Egroup{%
671: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
672: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
673: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
674: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
675: \egroup % End the \vtop.
676: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
677: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
678: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
679: \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
680: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
681: % group, force a page break.
682: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
683: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
684: \page
685: \fi
686: \fi
687: \box\groupbox
688: \prevdepth = \dimen1
689: \checkinserts
690: }
691: %
692: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
693: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
694: %
695: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
696: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
697: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
698:
699: % @need space-in-mils
700: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
701:
702: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
703:
704: \parseargdef\need{%
705: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
706: % paragraph.
707: \par
708: %
709: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
710: \dimen0 = #1\mil
711: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
712: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
713: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
714: %
715: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
716: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
717: % And a page break here is fine.
718: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
719: %
720: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
721: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
722: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
723: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
724: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
725: %
726: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
727: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
728: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
729: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
730: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
731: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
732: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
733: \penalty9999
734: %
735: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
736: \kern -#1\mil
737: %
738: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
739: \nobreak
740: \fi
741: }
742:
743: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
744:
745: \let\br = \par
746:
747: % @page forces the start of a new page.
748: %
749: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
750:
751: % @exdent text....
752: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
753:
754: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
755: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
756: \newskip\exdentamount
757:
758: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
759: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
760:
761: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
762: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
763: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
764:
765: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
766: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
767: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
768: %
769: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
770: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
771: %
772: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
773: \nobreak
774: \kern-\strutdepth
775: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
776: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
777: \vss
778: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
779: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
780: \ifx#1l%
781: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
782: \else
783: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
784: \fi
785: \null
786: }%
787: }}
788: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
789: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
790: %
791: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
792: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
793: % else use TEXT for both).
794: %
795: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
796: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
797: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
798: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
799: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
800: \def\righttext{#2}%
801: \else
802: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
803: \def\righttext{#1}%
804: \fi
805: %
806: \ifodd\pageno
807: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
808: \else
809: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
810: \fi
811: \temp
812: }
813:
814: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
815: % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
816: % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
817: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
818: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
819: % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
820: %
821: \def\|{%
822: % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
823: \leavevmode
824: %
825: % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
826: \vadjust{%
827: % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
828: % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
829: \vskip-\baselineskip
830: %
831: % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
832: % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
833: \llap{%
834: %
835: % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
836: \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
837: %
838: % This is the space between the bar and the text.
839: \hskip 12pt
840: }%
841: }%
842: }
843:
844: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
845: %
846: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
847: \def\includezzz#1{%
848: \pushthisfilestack
849: \def\thisfile{#1}%
850: {%
851: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
852: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
853: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
854: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
855: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
856: %
857: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
858: % definitions, etc.
859: \expandafter
860: }\temp
861: \popthisfilestack
862: }
863: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
864: \catcode`\\=\other
865: \catcode`~=\other
866: \catcode`^=\other
867: \catcode`_=\other
868: \catcode`|=\other
869: \catcode`<=\other
870: \catcode`>=\other
871: \catcode`+=\other
872: \catcode`-=\other
873: \catcode`\`=\other
874: \catcode`\'=\other
875: }
876:
877: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
878: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
879: }
880: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
881: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
882: }
883: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
884: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
885: }
886:
887: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
888: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
889: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
890: %
891: \def\thisfile{}
892:
893: % @center line
894: % outputs that line, centered.
895: %
896: \parseargdef\center{%
897: \ifhmode
898: \let\centersub\centerH
899: \else
900: \let\centersub\centerV
901: \fi
902: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
903: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
904: }
905: \def\centerH#1{{%
906: \hfil\break
907: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
908: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
909: \line{#1}%
910: \break
911: }}
912: %
913: \newcount\centerpenalty
914: \def\centerV#1{%
915: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
916: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
917: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
918: % prevent a page break here.
919: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
920: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
921: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
922: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
923: }
924:
925: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
926: %
927: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
928:
929: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
930: % @c is the same as @comment
931: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
932: %
933: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
934: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
935: \commentxxx}
936: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
937: %
938: \let\c=\comment
939:
940: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
941: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
942: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
943: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
944: %
945: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
946: \def\noneword{none}
947: %
948: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
949: \def\temp{#1}%
950: \ifx\temp\asisword
951: \else
952: \ifx\temp\noneword
953: \defaultparindent = 0pt
954: \else
955: \defaultparindent = #1em
956: \fi
957: \fi
958: \parindent = \defaultparindent
959: }
960:
961: % @exampleindent NCHARS
962: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
963: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
964: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
965: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
966: \def\temp{#1}%
967: \ifx\temp\asisword
968: \else
969: \ifx\temp\noneword
970: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
971: \else
972: \lispnarrowing = #1em
973: \fi
974: \fi
975: }
976:
977: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
978: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
979: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
980: % paragraphs.
981: %
982: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
983: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
984: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
985: % By default, we suppress indentation.
986: %
987: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
988: \def\insertword{insert}
989: %
990: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
991: \def\temp{#1}%
992: \ifx\temp\noneword
993: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
994: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
995: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
996: \else
997: \errhelp = \EMsimple
998: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
999: \fi\fi
1000: }
1001:
1002: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
1003: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1004: %
1005: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1006: % paragraph.
1007: %
1008: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1009: \gdef\indent{%
1010: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1011: \indent
1012: }%
1013: \gdef\noindent{%
1014: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1015: \noindent
1016: }%
1017: \global\everypar = {%
1018: \kern -\parindent
1019: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1020: }%
1021: }
1022:
1023: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1024: \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1025: \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1026: \global \everypar = {}%
1027: }
1028:
1029:
1030: % @refill is a no-op.
1031: \let\refill=\relax
1032:
1033: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1034: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1035: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1036: %
1037: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1038: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1039:
1040: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1041: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1042: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1043: \def\setfilename{%
1044: \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1045: \iflinks
1046: \tryauxfile
1047: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1048: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1049: \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1050: \openindices
1051: \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1052: %
1053: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1054: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1055: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1056: \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1057: \closein 1
1058: %
1059: \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1060: }
1061:
1062: % Called from \setfilename.
1063: %
1064: \def\openindices{%
1065: \newindex{cp}%
1066: \newcodeindex{fn}%
1067: \newcodeindex{vr}%
1068: \newcodeindex{tp}%
1069: \newcodeindex{ky}%
1070: \newcodeindex{pg}%
1071: }
1072:
1073: % @bye.
1074: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1075:
1076:
1077: \message{pdf,}
1078: % adobe `portable' document format
1079: \newcount\tempnum
1080: \newcount\lnkcount
1081: \newtoks\filename
1082: \newcount\filenamelength
1083: \newcount\pgn
1084: \newtoks\toksA
1085: \newtoks\toksB
1086: \newtoks\toksC
1087: \newtoks\toksD
1088: \newbox\boxA
1089: \newcount\countA
1090: \newif\ifpdf
1091: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1092:
1093: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1094: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1095: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1096: \else
1097: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1098: \else
1099: \ifcase\pdfoutput
1100: \else
1101: \pdftrue
1102: \fi
1103: \fi
1104: \fi
1105:
1106: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1107: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1108: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1109: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1110: %
1111: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1112: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1113: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1114: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1115: % do this reliably, so we use it.
1116:
1117: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1118: % which we \xdef.
1119: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1120: \ifx\pdfescapestring\relax
1121: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1122: % Many times it won't matter.
1123: \else
1124: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1125: % backslashes, and other special chars.
1126: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1127: \fi
1128: }
1129:
1130: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1131: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1132: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1133: output) for that.)}
1134:
1135: \ifpdf
1136: %
1137: % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
1138: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1139: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1140: % of actual black.
1141: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1142: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1143: %
1144: % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1145: % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1146: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
1147: %
1148: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1149: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1150: \def\setcolor#1{%
1151: \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1152: \domark
1153: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1154: }
1155: %
1156: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1157: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1158: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1159: \def\lastcolordefs{}
1160: %
1161: \def\makefootline{%
1162: \baselineskip24pt
1163: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1164: }
1165: %
1166: \def\makeheadline{%
1167: \vbox to 0pt{%
1168: \vskip-22.5pt
1169: \line{%
1170: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1171: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1172: \getcolormarks
1173: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1174: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1175: }%
1176: \vss
1177: }%
1178: \nointerlineskip
1179: }
1180: %
1181: %
1182: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1183: %
1184: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1185: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1186: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1187: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1188: %
1189: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1190: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1191: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1192: % bitmap.
1193: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1194: \begingroup
1195: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1196: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1197: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1198: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1199: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1200: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1201: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1202: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1203: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1204: \fi
1205: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1206: \fi
1207: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1208: \fi
1209: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1210: \fi
1211: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1212: \fi
1213: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1214: \fi
1215: \closein 1
1216: \endgroup
1217: %
1218: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1219: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1220: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1221: \immediate\pdfimage
1222: \else
1223: \immediate\pdfximage
1224: \fi
1225: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
1226: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
1227: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1228: #1.\pdfimgext
1229: \else
1230: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1231: \fi
1232: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1233: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1234: \fi}
1235: %
1236: \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1237: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1238: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1239: \indexnofonts
1240: \turnoffactive
1241: \makevalueexpandable
1242: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1243: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1244: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1245: }}
1246: %
1247: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1248: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1249: %
1250: % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
1251: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
1252: \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1253: \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1254: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1255: %
1256: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1257: % come from Petr Olsak
1258: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1259: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1260: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1261: \advance\tempnum by 1
1262: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1263: %
1264: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1265: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1266: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1267: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1268: % #4 is the page number
1269: %
1270: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1271: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1272: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1273: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1274: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1275: \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1276: \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1277: \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1278: \else
1279: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
1280: \fi
1281: %
1282: % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
1283: \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1284: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1285: %
1286: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1287: }
1288: %
1289: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1290: \begingroup
1291: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1292: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1293: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1294: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1295: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1296: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1297: }%
1298: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1299: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1300: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1301: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1302: }%
1303: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1304: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1305: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1306: }%
1307: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1308: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1309: }%
1310: \def\thischapnum{0}%
1311: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1312: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1313: %
1314: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1315: % al. a second time, below.
1316: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1317: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1318: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1319: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1320: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1321: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1322: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1323: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1324: \readdatafile{toc}%
1325: %
1326: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1327: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1328: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1329: %
1330: % We use the node names as the destinations.
1331: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1332: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1333: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1334: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1335: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1336: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1337: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1338: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1339: %
1340: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1341: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1342: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1343: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1344: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1345: %
1346: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1347: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
1348: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
1349: % we use for the index sort strings.
1350: %
1351: \indexnofonts
1352: \setupdatafile
1353: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1354: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1355: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1356: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1357: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1358: \input \tocreadfilename
1359: \endgroup
1360: }
1361: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1362: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1363: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1364: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1365: ]
1366: %
1367: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1368: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1369: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1370: \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1371: \advance\filenamelength by 1
1372: \fi
1373: \fi
1374: \nextsp}
1375: \def\getfilename#1{%
1376: \filenamelength=0
1377: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1378: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1379: \edef\temp{#1}%
1380: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1381: }
1382: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1383: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1384: \else
1385: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1386: \fi
1387: % make a live url in pdf output.
1388: \def\pdfurl#1{%
1389: \begingroup
1390: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1391: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1392: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1393: % people have actually reported a problem with.
1394: %
1395: \normalturnoffactive
1396: \def\@{@}%
1397: \let\/=\empty
1398: \makevalueexpandable
1399: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1400: % special-casing \var here?
1401: \def\var##1{##1}%
1402: %
1403: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1404: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1405: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1406: \endgroup}
1407: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1408: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1409: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1410: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1411: \def\maketoks{%
1412: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1413: \ifx\first0\adn0
1414: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1415: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1416: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1417: \else
1418: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1419: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1420: \let\next=\maketoks
1421: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1422: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1423: \fi
1424: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1425: \next}
1426: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1427: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1428: \def\pdflink#1{%
1429: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1430: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1431: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1432: \else
1433: % non-pdf mode
1434: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1435: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1436: \let\endlink = \relax
1437: \let\setcolor = \gobble
1438: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1439: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1440: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1441:
1442:
1443: \message{fonts,}
1444:
1445: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1446: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1447: % italics, not bold italics.
1448: %
1449: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
1450: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1451: \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
1452: }
1453:
1454: % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1455: %
1456: \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1457:
1458: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1459: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1460: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1461: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1462: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1463:
1464: % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1465: % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
1466: \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
1467:
1468: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1469: % So we set up a \sf.
1470: \newfam\sffam
1471: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1472: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1473:
1474: % We don't need math for this font style.
1475: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1476:
1477:
1478: % Default leading.
1479: \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
1480:
1481: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1482: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1483: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1484: %
1485: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1486: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1487: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1488: %
1489: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1490: \def\baselinefactor{1}
1491: %
1492: \def\setleading#1{%
1493: \dimen0 = #1\relax
1494: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1495: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1496: \normalbaselines
1497: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1498: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1499: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1500: }%
1501: }
1502:
1503: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1504: %
1505: % do nothing with this by default.
1506: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1507: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1508: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1509:
1510: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1511: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1512: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1513: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1514: \begingroup
1515: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1516: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1517: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1518: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1519: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1520: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1521: %%Version: 1.000
1522: %%EndComments
1523: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1524: 12 dict begin
1525: begincmap
1526: /CIDSystemInfo
1527: << /Registry (TeX)
1528: /Ordering (OT1)
1529: /Supplement 0
1530: >> def
1531: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1532: /CMapType 2 def
1533: 1 begincodespacerange
1534: <00> <7F>
1535: endcodespacerange
1536: 8 beginbfrange
1537: <00> <01> <0393>
1538: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1539: <23> <26> <0023>
1540: <28> <3B> <0028>
1541: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1542: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1543: <61> <7A> <0061>
1544: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1545: endbfrange
1546: 40 beginbfchar
1547: <02> <0398>
1548: <03> <039B>
1549: <04> <039E>
1550: <05> <03A0>
1551: <06> <03A3>
1552: <07> <03D2>
1553: <08> <03A6>
1554: <0B> <00660066>
1555: <0C> <00660069>
1556: <0D> <0066006C>
1557: <0E> <006600660069>
1558: <0F> <00660066006C>
1559: <10> <0131>
1560: <11> <0237>
1561: <12> <0060>
1562: <13> <00B4>
1563: <14> <02C7>
1564: <15> <02D8>
1565: <16> <00AF>
1566: <17> <02DA>
1567: <18> <00B8>
1568: <19> <00DF>
1569: <1A> <00E6>
1570: <1B> <0153>
1571: <1C> <00F8>
1572: <1D> <00C6>
1573: <1E> <0152>
1574: <1F> <00D8>
1575: <21> <0021>
1576: <22> <201D>
1577: <27> <2019>
1578: <3C> <00A1>
1579: <3D> <003D>
1580: <3E> <00BF>
1581: <5C> <201C>
1582: <5F> <02D9>
1583: <60> <2018>
1584: <7D> <02DD>
1585: <7E> <007E>
1586: <7F> <00A8>
1587: endbfchar
1588: endcmap
1589: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1590: end
1591: end
1592: %%EndResource
1593: %%EOF
1594: }\endgroup
1595: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1596: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1597: }%
1598: %
1599: % \cmapOT1IT
1600: \begingroup
1601: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1602: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1603: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1604: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1605: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1606: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1607: %%Version: 1.000
1608: %%EndComments
1609: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1610: 12 dict begin
1611: begincmap
1612: /CIDSystemInfo
1613: << /Registry (TeX)
1614: /Ordering (OT1IT)
1615: /Supplement 0
1616: >> def
1617: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1618: /CMapType 2 def
1619: 1 begincodespacerange
1620: <00> <7F>
1621: endcodespacerange
1622: 8 beginbfrange
1623: <00> <01> <0393>
1624: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1625: <25> <26> <0025>
1626: <28> <3B> <0028>
1627: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1628: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1629: <61> <7A> <0061>
1630: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1631: endbfrange
1632: 42 beginbfchar
1633: <02> <0398>
1634: <03> <039B>
1635: <04> <039E>
1636: <05> <03A0>
1637: <06> <03A3>
1638: <07> <03D2>
1639: <08> <03A6>
1640: <0B> <00660066>
1641: <0C> <00660069>
1642: <0D> <0066006C>
1643: <0E> <006600660069>
1644: <0F> <00660066006C>
1645: <10> <0131>
1646: <11> <0237>
1647: <12> <0060>
1648: <13> <00B4>
1649: <14> <02C7>
1650: <15> <02D8>
1651: <16> <00AF>
1652: <17> <02DA>
1653: <18> <00B8>
1654: <19> <00DF>
1655: <1A> <00E6>
1656: <1B> <0153>
1657: <1C> <00F8>
1658: <1D> <00C6>
1659: <1E> <0152>
1660: <1F> <00D8>
1661: <21> <0021>
1662: <22> <201D>
1663: <23> <0023>
1664: <24> <00A3>
1665: <27> <2019>
1666: <3C> <00A1>
1667: <3D> <003D>
1668: <3E> <00BF>
1669: <5C> <201C>
1670: <5F> <02D9>
1671: <60> <2018>
1672: <7D> <02DD>
1673: <7E> <007E>
1674: <7F> <00A8>
1675: endbfchar
1676: endcmap
1677: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1678: end
1679: end
1680: %%EndResource
1681: %%EOF
1682: }\endgroup
1683: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
1684: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1685: }%
1686: %
1687: % \cmapOT1TT
1688: \begingroup
1689: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1690: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1691: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1692: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1693: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1694: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1695: %%Version: 1.000
1696: %%EndComments
1697: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1698: 12 dict begin
1699: begincmap
1700: /CIDSystemInfo
1701: << /Registry (TeX)
1702: /Ordering (OT1TT)
1703: /Supplement 0
1704: >> def
1705: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
1706: /CMapType 2 def
1707: 1 begincodespacerange
1708: <00> <7F>
1709: endcodespacerange
1710: 5 beginbfrange
1711: <00> <01> <0393>
1712: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1713: <21> <26> <0021>
1714: <28> <5F> <0028>
1715: <61> <7E> <0061>
1716: endbfrange
1717: 32 beginbfchar
1718: <02> <0398>
1719: <03> <039B>
1720: <04> <039E>
1721: <05> <03A0>
1722: <06> <03A3>
1723: <07> <03D2>
1724: <08> <03A6>
1725: <0B> <2191>
1726: <0C> <2193>
1727: <0D> <0027>
1728: <0E> <00A1>
1729: <0F> <00BF>
1730: <10> <0131>
1731: <11> <0237>
1732: <12> <0060>
1733: <13> <00B4>
1734: <14> <02C7>
1735: <15> <02D8>
1736: <16> <00AF>
1737: <17> <02DA>
1738: <18> <00B8>
1739: <19> <00DF>
1740: <1A> <00E6>
1741: <1B> <0153>
1742: <1C> <00F8>
1743: <1D> <00C6>
1744: <1E> <0152>
1745: <1F> <00D8>
1746: <20> <2423>
1747: <27> <2019>
1748: <60> <2018>
1749: <7F> <00A8>
1750: endbfchar
1751: endcmap
1752: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1753: end
1754: end
1755: %%EndResource
1756: %%EOF
1757: }\endgroup
1758: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
1759: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1760: }%
1761: \fi\fi
1762:
1763:
1764: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1765: % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1766: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1767: % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
1768: % empty to omit).
1769: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1770: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
1771: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
1772: }
1773: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1774: \let\cmap\gobble
1775: % emacs-page end of cmaps
1776:
1777: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1778: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1779: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1780: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
1781: \def\fontprefix{cm}
1782: \fi
1783: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1784: \def\rmshape{r}
1785: \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
1786: \def\bfshape{b}
1787: \def\bxshape{bx}
1788: \def\ttshape{tt}
1789: \def\ttbshape{tt}
1790: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
1791: \def\itshape{ti}
1792: \def\itbshape{bxti}
1793: \def\slshape{sl}
1794: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
1795: \def\sfshape{ss}
1796: \def\sfbshape{ss}
1797: \def\scshape{csc}
1798: \def\scbshape{csc}
1799:
1800: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
1801: % Texinfo.
1802: %
1803: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1804: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1805: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1806: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1807: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1808: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1809: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1810: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1811: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1812: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1813: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1814: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1815: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1816: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1817: \def\textecsize{1095}
1818:
1819: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1820: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1821: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1822: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1823: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1824:
1825: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1826: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1827: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1828: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1829: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1830: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1831: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1832: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1833: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1834: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1835: \font\smalli=cmmi9
1836: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1837: \def\smallecsize{0900}
1838:
1839: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1840: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1841: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1842: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1843: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1844: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1845: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1846: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1847: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1848: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1849: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1850: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1851: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1852:
1853: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1854: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1855: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1856: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1857: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1858: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1859: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1860: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1861: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1862: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1863: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1864: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1865: \def\titleecsize{2074}
1866:
1867: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1868: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1869: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1870: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
1871: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1872: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1873: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1874: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
1875: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
1876: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1877: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1878: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1879: \def\chapecsize{1728}
1880:
1881: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
1882: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1883: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1884: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
1885: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1886: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1887: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1888: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1889: \let\secbf\secrm
1890: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1891: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1892: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1893: \def\sececsize{1440}
1894:
1895: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1896: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1897: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1898: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
1899: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1900: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1901: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
1902: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1903: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1904: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1905: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1906: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1907: \def\ssececsize{1200}
1908:
1909: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1910: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1911: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1912: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1913: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1914: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
1915: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1916: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1917: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1918: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1919: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
1920: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1921: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
1922:
1923: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
1924: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
1925: \rm
1926: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions
1927:
1928:
1929: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
1930: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
1931: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
1932: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
1933: %
1934: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
1935: % Text fonts (10pt).
1936: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
1937: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
1938: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1939: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1940: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1941: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1942: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1943: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1944: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1945: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1946: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1947: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1948: \def\textecsize{1000}
1949:
1950: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1951: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1952: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1953: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1954: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1955:
1956: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1957: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1958: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1959: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1960: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1961: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1962: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1963: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1964: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1965: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1966: \font\smalli=cmmi9
1967: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1968: \def\smallecsize{0900}
1969:
1970: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1971: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1972: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1973: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1974: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1975: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1976: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1977: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1978: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1979: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1980: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1981: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1982: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1983:
1984: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1985: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1986: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1987: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1988: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1989: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1990: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1991: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1992: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1993: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1994: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1995: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1996: \def\titleecsize{2074}
1997:
1998: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
1999: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2000: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2001: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2002: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2003: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2004: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2005: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2006: \let\chapbf\chaprm
2007: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2008: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2009: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2010: \def\chapecsize{1440}
2011:
2012: % Section fonts (12pt).
2013: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2014: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2015: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2016: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2017: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2018: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2019: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2020: \let\secbf\secrm
2021: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2022: \font\seci=cmmi12
2023: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2024: \def\sececsize{1200}
2025:
2026: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
2027: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2028: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2029: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2030: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2031: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2032: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2033: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2034: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2035: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2036: \font\sseci=cmmi10
2037: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
2038: \def\ssececsize{1000}
2039:
2040: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2041: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2042: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2043: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2044: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2045: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2046: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2047: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2048: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2049: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2050: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
2051: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2052: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
2053:
2054: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
2055: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
2056: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2057: \rm
2058: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions
2059:
2060:
2061: % We provide the user-level command
2062: % @fonttextsize 10
2063: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
2064: %
2065: \def\xiword{11}
2066: \def\xword{10}
2067: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
2068: %
2069: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2070: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2071: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2072: %
2073: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2074: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2075: %
2076: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2077: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2078: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2079: \else
2080: \errhelp=\EMsimple
2081: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2082: \fi\fi
2083: \endgroup
2084: }
2085:
2086:
2087: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2088: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
2089: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
2090: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
2091: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2092: %
2093: \def\resetmathfonts{%
2094: \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
2095: \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
2096: \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2097: }
2098:
2099: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2100: % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2101: % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2102: % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2103: %
2104: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2105: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
2106: % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2107: %
2108: % This all needs generalizing, badly.
2109: %
2110: \def\textfonts{%
2111: \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
2112: \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2113: \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
2114: \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2115: \def\curfontsize{text}%
2116: \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2117: \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2118: \def\titlefonts{%
2119: \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
2120: \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
2121: \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
2122: \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2123: \def\curfontsize{title}%
2124: \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2125: \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
2126: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2127: \def\chapfonts{%
2128: \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
2129: \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2130: \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
2131: \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
2132: \def\curfontsize{chap}%
2133: \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2134: \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
2135: \def\secfonts{%
2136: \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
2137: \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2138: \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
2139: \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2140: \def\curfontsize{sec}%
2141: \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2142: \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
2143: \def\subsecfonts{%
2144: \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
2145: \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2146: \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
2147: \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2148: \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2149: \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2150: \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2151: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
2152: \def\reducedfonts{%
2153: \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
2154: \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
2155: \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
2156: \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2157: \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2158: \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2159: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2160: \def\smallfonts{%
2161: \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
2162: \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
2163: \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
2164: \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2165: \def\curfontsize{small}%
2166: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2167: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2168: \def\smallerfonts{%
2169: \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
2170: \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
2171: \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
2172: \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2173: \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2174: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2175: \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
2176:
2177: % Fonts for short table of contents.
2178: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2179: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
2180: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2181: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2182:
2183: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2184: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2185: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2186:
2187: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2188: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2189:
2190: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2191: % can fit this many characters:
2192: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
2193: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2194: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
2195: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2196: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
2197: %
2198: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2199: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
2200: % --karl, 24jan03.
2201:
2202: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2203: %
2204: \definetextfontsizexi
2205:
2206:
2207: \message{markup,}
2208:
2209: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2210: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2211: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2212: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
2213: %
2214: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2215:
2216: % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2217: % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2218: % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2219: % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2220: % currently in effect.
2221: \newif\ifmarkupvar
2222: \newif\ifmarkupsamp
2223: \newif\ifmarkupkey
2224: %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2225: %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2226: \newif\ifmarkupcode
2227: \newif\ifmarkupkbd
2228: %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2229: %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2230: \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2231: \newif\ifmarkupexample
2232: \newif\ifmarkupverb
2233: \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2234:
2235: \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2236:
2237: \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2238: \csname markup#1true\endcsname
2239: \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2240: \markupstylesetup
2241: }
2242:
2243: \let\markupstylesetup\empty
2244:
2245: \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2246: \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2247: \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2248: \def#1%
2249: }
2250:
2251: % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2252: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2253: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2254: \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2255: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2256: }
2257:
2258: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2259: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2260: \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2261: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2262: }
2263:
2264: {
2265: \catcode`\'=\active
2266: \catcode`\`=\active
2267:
2268: \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
2269: \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
2270:
2271: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
2272: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
2273:
2274: \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
2275: }
2276:
2277: \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2278: \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2279: %
2280: \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2281: \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2282: %
2283: \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
2284: \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
2285: %
2286: \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2287: \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2288: %
2289: \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2290: \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2291:
2292: \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
2293:
2294: % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
2295: % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
2296: % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
2297: % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
2298: % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
2299: %
2300: \def\codequoteright{%
2301: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2302: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2303: '%
2304: \else \char'15 \fi
2305: \else \char'15 \fi
2306: }
2307: %
2308: % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2309: % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2310: % the code environments to do likewise.
2311: %
2312: \def\codequoteleft{%
2313: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2314: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2315: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2316: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2317: \relax`%
2318: \else \char'22 \fi
2319: \else \char'22 \fi
2320: }
2321:
2322: % Commands to set the quote options.
2323: %
2324: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2325: \def\temp{#1}%
2326: \ifx\temp\onword
2327: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2328: = t%
2329: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2330: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2331: = \relax
2332: \else
2333: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2334: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2335: \fi\fi
2336: }
2337: %
2338: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2339: \def\temp{#1}%
2340: \ifx\temp\onword
2341: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2342: = t%
2343: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2344: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2345: = \relax
2346: \else
2347: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2348: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2349: \fi\fi
2350: }
2351:
2352: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2353: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2354:
2355: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2356: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2357:
2358: % Font commands.
2359:
2360: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2361: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2362: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2363: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2364: \ifusingtt
2365: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
2366: {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2367: \next
2368: }
2369: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2370: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2371:
2372: % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
2373: % character) is such as not to need one.
2374: \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
2375: \ifx\next,%
2376: \else\ifx\next-%
2377: \else\ifx\next.%
2378: \else\ptexslash
2379: \fi\fi\fi
2380: \aftersmartic
2381: }
2382:
2383: % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl, and no ic.
2384: % @var is set to this for defun arguments.
2385: \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
2386:
2387: % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
2388: % ttsl for book titles, do we?
2389: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
2390:
2391: \def\aftersmartic{}
2392: \def\var#1{%
2393: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
2394: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
2395: \smartslanted{#1}%
2396: }
2397:
2398: \let\i=\smartitalic
2399: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
2400: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
2401: \let\emph=\smartitalic
2402:
2403: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2404: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
2405: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2406: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2407:
2408: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
2409: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2410: \let\strong=\b
2411:
2412: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2413: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2414:
2415: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2416: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2417: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2418: %
2419: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2420: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2421:
2422: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2423: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2424: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2425: %
2426: \catcode`@=11
2427: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2428: \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2429: \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2430: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2431: }
2432: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2433: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2434: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2435: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2436: }
2437: \catcode`@=\other
2438: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2439:
2440: % @t, explicit typewriter.
2441: \def\t#1{%
2442: {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2443: \null
2444: }
2445:
2446: % @samp.
2447: \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2448:
2449: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
2450: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2451: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
2452: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2453: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2454: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2455: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2456: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2457: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2458:
2459: % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
2460: % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
2461: % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2462: %
2463: \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
2464: \nohyphenation
2465: \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2466: #1}\null}
2467:
2468: % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
2469: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2470:
2471: % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
2472: \let\file=\samp
2473: \let\option=\samp
2474:
2475: % @code is a modification of @t,
2476: % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
2477: \def\tclose#1{%
2478: {%
2479: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2480: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2481: %
2482: % Switch to typewriter.
2483: \tt
2484: %
2485: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2486: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2487: %
2488: % Turn off hyphenation.
2489: \nohyphenation
2490: %
2491: \rawbackslash
2492: \plainfrenchspacing
2493: #1%
2494: }%
2495: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2496: }
2497:
2498: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2499: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2500: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2501:
2502: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2503: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2504: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2505: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
2506: % -- rms.
2507: {
2508: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2509: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2510: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
2511: %
2512: \global\def\code{\begingroup
2513: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2514: % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2515: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
2516: \ifallowcodebreaks
2517: \let-\codedash
2518: \let_\codeunder
2519: \else
2520: \let-\realdash
2521: \let_\realunder
2522: \fi
2523: \codex
2524: }
2525: }
2526:
2527: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2528:
2529: \def\realdash{-}
2530: \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2531: \def\codeunder{%
2532: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2533: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2534: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2535: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2536: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2537: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2538: \else\normalunderscore \fi
2539: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2540: {\_}%
2541: }
2542:
2543: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2544: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
2545: % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
2546: % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
2547: %
2548: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2549:
2550: \def\keywordtrue{true}
2551: \def\keywordfalse{false}
2552:
2553: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2554: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2555: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2556: \allowcodebreakstrue
2557: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2558: \allowcodebreaksfalse
2559: \else
2560: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2561: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
2562: \fi\fi
2563: }
2564:
2565: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2566: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2567: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2568: % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2569: % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
2570: % for comparison.)
2571: \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
2572: \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2573: \unsepspaces
2574: \pdfurl{#1}%
2575: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2576: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2577: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2578: \else
2579: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2580: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2581: \ifpdf
2582: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2583: \else
2584: \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2585: \fi
2586: \else
2587: \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2588: \fi
2589: \fi
2590: \endlink
2591: \endgroup}
2592:
2593: % This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
2594: \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
2595: \let\uref=\urefbreak
2596: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
2597: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
2598: \unsepspaces
2599: \pdfurl{#1}%
2600: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2601: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2602: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2603: \else
2604: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2605: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2606: \ifpdf
2607: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2608: \else
2609: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2610: \fi
2611: \else
2612: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
2613: \fi
2614: \fi
2615: \endlink
2616: \endgroup}
2617:
2618: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
2619: \def\urefcatcodes{%
2620: \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
2621: \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
2622: \catcode\slashChar=\active
2623: }
2624: {
2625: \urefcatcodes
2626: %
2627: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
2628: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2629: \urefcatcodes
2630: \let&\urefcodeamp
2631: \let.\urefcodedot
2632: \let#\urefcodehash
2633: \let?\urefcodequest
2634: \let/\urefcodeslash
2635: \codex
2636: }
2637: %
2638: % By default, they are just regular characters.
2639: \global\def&{\normalamp}
2640: \global\def.{\normaldot}
2641: \global\def#{\normalhash}
2642: \global\def?{\normalquest}
2643: \global\def/{\normalslash}
2644: }
2645:
2646: % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
2647: % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
2648: % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
2649: \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
2650: \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
2651: %
2652: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
2653: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
2654: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
2655: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
2656: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
2657: {
2658: \catcode`\/=\active
2659: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
2660: \urefprestretch \slashChar
2661: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
2662: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
2663: \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
2664: }
2665: }
2666:
2667: % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
2668: % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
2669: % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
2670: %
2671: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
2672: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2673: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
2674: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2675: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
2676: \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2677: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
2678: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
2679: \else
2680: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2681: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2682: \fi\fi\fi
2683: }
2684: \def\wordafter{after}
2685: \def\wordbefore{before}
2686: \def\wordnone{none}
2687:
2688: \urefbreakstyle after
2689:
2690: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2691: %
2692: \let\url=\uref
2693:
2694: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2695: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2696: %
2697: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2698: \ifpdf
2699: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2700: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2701: \unsepspaces
2702: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2703: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2704: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2705: \endlink
2706: \endgroup}
2707: \else
2708: \let\email=\uref
2709: \fi
2710:
2711: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2712: % then @kbd has no effect.
2713: \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
2714:
2715: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2716: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2717: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2718: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2719: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2720: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2721: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2722: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2723: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2724: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2725: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2726: \else
2727: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2728: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2729: \fi\fi\fi
2730: }
2731: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
2732: \def\wordexample{example}
2733: \def\wordcode{code}
2734:
2735: % Default is `distinct'.
2736: \kbdinputstyle distinct
2737:
2738: \def\xkey{\key}
2739: \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2740: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2741: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2742: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
2743:
2744: % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
2745: \let\indicateurl=\code
2746: \let\env=\code
2747: \let\command=\code
2748:
2749: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2750: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2751:
2752: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
2753: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2754: \def\click{\arrow}
2755:
2756: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
2757: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2758: %
2759: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2760:
2761: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2762: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
2763: % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
2764: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2765:
2766: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2767: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2768: % all-uppercase.
2769: %
2770: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2771: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2772: {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2773: \def\temp{#2}%
2774: \ifx\temp\empty \else
2775: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2776: \fi
2777: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2778: }
2779:
2780: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2781: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2782: %
2783: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2784: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2785: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2786: \def\temp{#2}%
2787: \ifx\temp\empty \else
2788: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2789: \fi
2790: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2791: }
2792:
2793: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
2794: %
2795: \def\asis#1{#1}
2796:
2797: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2798: %
2799: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
2800: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
2801: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
2802: % which is what @var uses.
2803: {
2804: \catcode`\_ = \active
2805: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
2806: \catcode`\_=\active
2807: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
2808: }
2809: }
2810: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
2811: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
2812: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
2813: %
2814: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
2815: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
2816: %
2817: \def\math{%
2818: \tex
2819: \mathunderscore
2820: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
2821: \mathactive
2822: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
2823: \let\"=\ddot
2824: \let\'=\acute
2825: \let\==\bar
2826: \let\^=\hat
2827: \let\`=\grave
2828: \let\u=\breve
2829: \let\v=\check
2830: \let\~=\tilde
2831: \let\dotaccent=\dot
2832: $\finishmath
2833: }
2834: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
2835:
2836: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
2837: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
2838: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
2839: %
2840: {
2841: \catcode`^ = \active
2842: \catcode`< = \active
2843: \catcode`> = \active
2844: \catcode`+ = \active
2845: \catcode`' = \active
2846: \gdef\mathactive{%
2847: \let^ = \ptexhat
2848: \let< = \ptexless
2849: \let> = \ptexgtr
2850: \let+ = \ptexplus
2851: \let' = \ptexquoteright
2852: }
2853: }
2854:
2855: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
2856: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
2857: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
2858: %
2859: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
2860: %
2861: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
2862: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
2863: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
2864: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2865: }
2866: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
2867: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
2868: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
2869: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
2870: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
2871: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
2872: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
2873: %
2874: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
2875: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
2876: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
2877: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
2878: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2879: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
2880: }
2881:
2882:
2883: \message{glyphs,}
2884: % and logos.
2885:
2886: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
2887: \def\@{\char64 }
2888: \let\atchar=\@
2889:
2890: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
2891: % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
2892: % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
2893: \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
2894: \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
2895: \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
2896: \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
2897: \begingroup
2898: % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
2899: % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
2900: \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
2901: \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
2902: \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
2903: !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
2904: !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
2905: !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
2906: !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
2907: !endgroup
2908:
2909: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
2910: \let\comma = ,
2911:
2912: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
2913: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
2914: \let\, = \ptexc
2915: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
2916: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
2917: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
2918: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
2919: \let\udotaccent = \d
2920:
2921: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
2922: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
2923: \def\questiondown{?`}
2924: \def\exclamdown{!`}
2925: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
2926: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
2927:
2928: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
2929: \def\imacro{i}
2930: \def\jmacro{j}
2931: \def\dotless#1{%
2932: \def\temp{#1}%
2933: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
2934: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
2935: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
2936: \fi\fi
2937: }
2938:
2939: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
2940: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
2941: %
2942: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
2943:
2944: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
2945: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
2946: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
2947: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
2948: % \scriptscriptstyle).
2949: %
2950: \def\LaTeX{%
2951: L\kern-.36em
2952: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
2953: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
2954: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
2955: % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
2956: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
2957: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
2958: \else
2959: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
2960: \selectfonts\lllsize A%
2961: \fi
2962: }%
2963: \vss
2964: }}%
2965: \kern-.15em
2966: \TeX
2967: }
2968:
2969: % Some math mode symbols.
2970: \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
2971: \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
2972: \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
2973: \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
2974:
2975: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
2976: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
2977: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
2978: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
2979: % whichever is larger.
2980: %
2981: \def\dots{%
2982: \leavevmode
2983: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
2984: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
2985: \dimen0 = \wd0
2986: \else
2987: \dimen0 = 1.5em
2988: \fi
2989: \hbox to \dimen0{%
2990: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
2991: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2992: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2993: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
2994: }%
2995: }
2996:
2997: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
2998: %
2999: \def\enddots{%
3000: \dots
3001: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
3002: }
3003:
3004: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3005: %
3006: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3007: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3008: %
3009: \def\point{$\star$}
3010: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
3011: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
3012: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
3013: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
3014: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
3015:
3016: % The @error{} command.
3017: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3018: %
3019: \newbox\errorbox
3020: %
3021: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
3022: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
3023: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3024: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
3025: %
3026: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
3027: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
3028: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
3029: \vbox{%
3030: \hrule height\dimen2
3031: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
3032: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
3033: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
3034: \hrule height\dimen2}
3035: \hfil}
3036: %
3037: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
3038:
3039: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3040: %
3041: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
3042:
3043: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3044: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3045: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3046: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3047: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3048: %
3049: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3050: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3051: % font height.
3052: %
3053: % feymr - regular
3054: % feymo - slanted
3055: % feybr - bold
3056: % feybo - bold slanted
3057: %
3058: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3059: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3060: % Hmm.
3061: %
3062: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3063: % Hope not.
3064: %
3065: %
3066: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
3067: \def\eurofont{%
3068: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3069: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3070: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3071: % font installed.
3072: %
3073: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3074: % that to the current nominal size.
3075: %
3076: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3077: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3078: %
3079: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3080: %
3081: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3082: % bold:
3083: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
3084: \else
3085: % regular:
3086: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
3087: \fi
3088: \thiseurofont
3089: }
3090:
3091: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3092: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3093: % the redefinition.
3094: %
3095: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3096: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
3097: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
3098: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
3099: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
3100: %
3101: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
3102: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3103: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
3104: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3105: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
3106: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
3107: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
3108: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
3109: %
3110: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3111: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
3112: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3113: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3114: %
3115: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3116: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3117: % the same EC font.
3118: \def\ogonek#1{{%
3119: \def\temp{#1}%
3120: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3121: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3122: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3123: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3124: \else
3125: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
3126: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
3127: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
3128: \fi
3129: \fi\fi\fi\fi
3130: }%
3131: }
3132: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
3133: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
3134: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
3135: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
3136: %
3137: % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
3138: \def\ecfont{%
3139: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3140: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3141: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3142: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3143: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
3144: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3145: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3146: % bold:
3147: \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3148: \else
3149: % regular:
3150: \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3151: \fi
3152: \thisecfont
3153: }
3154:
3155: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
3156: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3157: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3158: %
3159: \def\registeredsymbol{%
3160: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
3161: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
3162: }$%
3163: }
3164:
3165: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3166: %
3167: \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
3168:
3169: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3170: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
3171: % so we'll define it if necessary.
3172: %
3173: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3174: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3175: \fi
3176:
3177: % Quotes.
3178: \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
3179: \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3180: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3181: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
3182:
3183:
3184: \message{page headings,}
3185:
3186: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3187: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3188:
3189: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3190: \newif\ifseenauthor
3191: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3192:
3193: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3194: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3195: %
3196: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3197: \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3198: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3199: \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3200:
3201: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3202: \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3203: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3204:
3205: \envdef\titlepage{%
3206: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3207: \begingroup
3208: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3209: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3210: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3211: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3212: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3213: %
3214: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3215: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3216: \let\oldpage = \page
3217: \def\page{%
3218: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3219: \finishtitlepage
3220: \fi
3221: \let\page = \oldpage
3222: \page
3223: \null
3224: }%
3225: }
3226:
3227: \def\Etitlepage{%
3228: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3229: \finishtitlepage
3230: \fi
3231: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3232: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3233: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3234: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3235: \oldpage
3236: \endgroup
3237: %
3238: % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3239: % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3240: \HEADINGSon
3241: %
3242: % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3243: \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3244: \shortcontents
3245: \contents
3246: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3247: \global\let\contents = \relax
3248: \fi
3249: %
3250: \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3251: \contents
3252: \global\let\contents = \relax
3253: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3254: \fi
3255: }
3256:
3257: \def\finishtitlepage{%
3258: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3259: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3260: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3261: }
3262:
3263: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3264:
3265: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
3266: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3267:
3268: \parseargdef\title{%
3269: \checkenv\titlepage
3270: \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
3271: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3272: \finishedtitlepagefalse
3273: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3274: }
3275:
3276: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
3277: \checkenv\titlepage
3278: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3279: }
3280:
3281: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
3282: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
3283: %
3284: \parseargdef\author{%
3285: \def\temp{\quotation}%
3286: \ifx\thisenv\temp
3287: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3288: \else
3289: \checkenv\titlepage
3290: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3291: {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3292: \fi
3293: }
3294:
3295:
3296: % Set up page headings and footings.
3297:
3298: \let\thispage=\folio
3299:
3300: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
3301: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
3302: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
3303: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
3304:
3305: % Now make TeX use those variables
3306: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3307: \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3308: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3309: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3310: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3311:
3312: % Commands to set those variables.
3313: % For example, this is what @headings on does
3314: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3315: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3316: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
3317: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3318:
3319:
3320: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3321: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3322: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3323: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3324:
3325: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3326: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3327: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3328: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3329:
3330: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3331:
3332: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3333: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3334: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3335: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3336:
3337: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3338: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3339: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3340: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3341: %
3342: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
3343: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3344: \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
3345: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3346: }
3347:
3348: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3349:
3350: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3351: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3352: %
3353: % The same set of arguments for:
3354: %
3355: % @oddheadingmarks
3356: % @evenfootingmarks
3357: % @oddfootingmarks
3358: % @everyheadingmarks
3359: % @everyfootingmarks
3360:
3361: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3362: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3363: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3364: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3365: \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3366: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3367: \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3368: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3369: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3370: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3371: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3372: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3373: }
3374:
3375: \everyheadingmarks bottom
3376: \everyfootingmarks bottom
3377:
3378: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3379: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3380: % @headings off turns them off.
3381: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3382: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3383: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3384: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3385: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3386: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3387:
3388: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3389:
3390: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3391: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
3392: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
3393: }
3394:
3395: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3396: \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
3397:
3398: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3399: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3400: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3401: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3402: % edge of all pages.
3403: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3404: \global\pageno=1
3405: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3406: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3407: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3408: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3409: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3410: }
3411: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3412:
3413: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3414: % page number on top right.
3415: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3416: \global\pageno=1
3417: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3418: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3419: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3420: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3421: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3422: }
3423: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3424:
3425: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
3426: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3427: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3428: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3429: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3430: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3431: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3432: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3433: }
3434:
3435: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
3436: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3437: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3438: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3439: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3440: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3441: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3442: }
3443:
3444: % Subroutines used in generating headings
3445: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3446: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3447: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3448: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
3449: \def\today{%
3450: \number\day\space
3451: \ifcase\month
3452: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3453: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3454: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3455: \fi
3456: \space\number\year}
3457: \fi
3458:
3459: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3460: % It generates no output of its own.
3461: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3462: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3463:
3464:
3465: \message{tables,}
3466: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3467:
3468: % default indentation of table text
3469: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
3470: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3471: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
3472: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3473: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
3474:
3475: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3476: \newdimen\itemmax
3477:
3478: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3479: % these defs.
3480: % They also define \itemindex
3481: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3482:
3483: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3484:
3485: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3486:
3487: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3488: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3489:
3490: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3491: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
3492: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
3493: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3494: \itemindex{#1}%
3495: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3496: %
3497: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3498: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3499: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3500: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3501: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3502: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
3503: %
3504: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3505: % but leave it ragged-right.
3506: \begingroup
3507: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
3508: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
3509: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
3510: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3511: \endgroup
3512: %
3513: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3514: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3515: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
3516: %
3517: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
3518: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3519: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3520: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
3521: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3522: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
3523: %
3524: \penalty 10001
3525: \endgroup
3526: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3527: \else
3528: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
3529: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3530: \noindent
3531: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3532: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3533: % eventually be printed.
3534: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
3535: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
3536: \unhbox0
3537: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3538: \endgroup
3539: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3540: \fi
3541: }
3542:
3543: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
3544: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
3545:
3546: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3547: \envdef\table{%
3548: \let\itemindex\gobble
3549: \tablecheck{table}%
3550: }
3551: \envdef\ftable{%
3552: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
3553: \tablecheck{ftable}%
3554: }
3555: \envdef\vtable{%
3556: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
3557: \tablecheck{vtable}%
3558: }
3559: \def\tablecheck#1{%
3560: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
3561: \endgroup
3562: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3563: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
3564: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3565: \else
3566: \let\next\tablex
3567: \fi
3568: \next
3569: }
3570: \def\tablex#1{%
3571: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3572: \parsearg\tabley
3573: }
3574: \def\tabley#1{%
3575: {%
3576: \makevalueexpandable
3577: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3578: \expandafter
3579: }\temp \endtablez
3580: }
3581: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3582: \aboveenvbreak
3583: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
3584: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
3585: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
3586: \itemmax=\tableindent
3587: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
3588: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
3589: \exdentamount=\tableindent
3590: \parindent = 0pt
3591: \parskip = \smallskipamount
3592: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3593: \let\item = \internalBitem
3594: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
3595: }
3596: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3597: \let\Eftable\Etable
3598: \let\Evtable\Etable
3599: \let\Eitemize\Etable
3600: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
3601:
3602: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3603:
3604: \newcount \itemno
3605:
3606: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3607:
3608: \def\doitemize#1{%
3609: \aboveenvbreak
3610: \itemmax=\itemindent
3611: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
3612: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3613: \exdentamount=\itemindent
3614: \parindent=0pt
3615: \parskip=\smallskipamount
3616: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3617: %
3618: % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
3619: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3620: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
3621: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
3622: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3623: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3624: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
3625: %
3626: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3627: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3628: %
3629: \let\item=\itemizeitem
3630: }
3631:
3632: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3633: %
3634: \def\itemizeitem{%
3635: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
3636: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3637: {%
3638: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3639: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3640: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
3641: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
3642: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3643: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3644: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
3645: % that's the theory.
3646: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
3647: \noindent
3648: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3649: %
3650: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
3651: \flushcr
3652: }
3653:
3654: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3655: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3656: %
3657: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3658:
3659: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3660: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
3661: % argument is the same as `1'.
3662: %
3663: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
3664: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3665: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3666: \def\thearg{#1}%
3667: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3668: %
3669: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
3670: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3671: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3672: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3673: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3674: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3675: \ifx\rest\empty
3676: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
3677: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3678: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3679: % not equal to itself.
3680: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3681: %
3682: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3683: % continuing to look for a <number>.
3684: %
3685: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
3686: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3687: \else
3688: % It's a letter.
3689: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
3690: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3691: \else
3692: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3693: \fi
3694: \fi
3695: \else
3696: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
3697: \numericenumerate
3698: \fi
3699: }
3700:
3701: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
3702: % given in \thearg.
3703: %
3704: \def\numericenumerate{%
3705: \itemno = \thearg
3706: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3707: }
3708:
3709: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3710: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3711: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3712: \startenumeration{%
3713: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3714: \ifnum\itemno=0
3715: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3716: alphabet}%
3717: \fi
3718: \char\lccode\itemno
3719: }%
3720: }
3721:
3722: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3723: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3724: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3725: \startenumeration{%
3726: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3727: \ifnum\itemno=0
3728: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3729: alphabet}
3730: \fi
3731: \char\uccode\itemno
3732: }%
3733: }
3734:
3735: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3736: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
3737: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3738: %
3739: \def\startenumeration#1{%
3740: \advance\itemno by -1
3741: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
3742: }
3743:
3744: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3745: % to @enumerate.
3746: %
3747: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
3748: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
3749: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3750: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3751:
3752:
3753: % @multitable macros
3754: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3755: %
3756: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3757: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
3758: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3759: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3760:
3761: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
3762:
3763: % To make preamble:
3764: %
3765: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
3766: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
3767: % @item ...
3768: %
3769: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
3770: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
3771: % columns as desired.
3772:
3773:
3774: % Or use a template:
3775: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3776: % @item ...
3777: % using the widest term desired in each column.
3778:
3779: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
3780: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
3781: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
3782: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
3783:
3784: % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
3785: % if they are.
3786:
3787: % Sample multitable:
3788:
3789: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3790: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
3791: % @item
3792: % first col stuff
3793: % @tab
3794: % second col stuff
3795: % @tab
3796: % third col
3797: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
3798: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
3799: %
3800: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
3801: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
3802: % @end multitable
3803:
3804: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
3805: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
3806: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
3807: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
3808: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
3809: % to baseline.
3810: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
3811: %
3812: \newskip\multitableparskip
3813: \newskip\multitableparindent
3814: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
3815: \newskip\multitablelinespace
3816: \multitableparskip=0pt
3817: \multitableparindent=6pt
3818: \multitablecolspace=12pt
3819: \multitablelinespace=0pt
3820:
3821: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
3822: %
3823: \let\endsetuptable\relax
3824: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
3825: \let\columnfractions\relax
3826: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
3827: \newif\ifsetpercent
3828:
3829: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
3830: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
3831: %
3832: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
3833: \global\advance\colcount by 1
3834: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
3835: \setuptable
3836: }
3837:
3838: \newcount\colcount
3839: \def\setuptable#1{%
3840: \def\firstarg{#1}%
3841: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
3842: \let\go = \relax
3843: \else
3844: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
3845: \global\setpercenttrue
3846: \else
3847: \ifsetpercent
3848: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
3849: \else
3850: \global\advance\colcount by 1
3851: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
3852: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
3853: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
3854: \fi
3855: \fi
3856: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
3857: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
3858: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
3859: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
3860: \else
3861: \let\go = \setuptable
3862: \fi%
3863: \fi
3864: \go
3865: }
3866:
3867: % multitable-only commands.
3868: %
3869: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3870: % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3871: % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
3872: % undo it ourselves.
3873: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
3874: \def\headitem{%
3875: \checkenv\multitable
3876: \crcr
3877: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
3878: \the\everytab % for the first item
3879: }%
3880: %
3881: % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
3882: % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
3883: % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
3884: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3885: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3886:
3887: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3888: %
3889: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
3890: %
3891: \envdef\multitable{%
3892: \vskip\parskip
3893: \startsavinginserts
3894: %
3895: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3896: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3897: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3898: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3899: \def\item{\crcr}%
3900: %
3901: \tolerance=9500
3902: \hbadness=9500
3903: \setmultitablespacing
3904: \parskip=\multitableparskip
3905: \parindent=\multitableparindent
3906: \overfullrule=0pt
3907: \global\colcount=0
3908: %
3909: \everycr = {%
3910: \noalign{%
3911: \global\everytab={}%
3912: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3913: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3914: \checkinserts
3915: % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3916: %\filbreak
3917: % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3918: % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
3919: % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3920: }%
3921: }%
3922: %
3923: \parsearg\domultitable
3924: }
3925: \def\domultitable#1{%
3926: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
3927: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
3928: %
3929: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
3930: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
3931: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
3932: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
3933: \halign\bgroup &%
3934: \global\advance\colcount by 1
3935: \multistrut
3936: \vtop{%
3937: % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
3938: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
3939: %
3940: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
3941: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
3942: % the first one.
3943: %
3944: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
3945: % to the width of each template entry.
3946: %
3947: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
3948: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
3949: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
3950: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
3951: %
3952: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
3953: \rightskip=0pt
3954: \ifnum\colcount=1
3955: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
3956: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
3957: \else
3958: \ifsetpercent \else
3959: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
3960: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
3961: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
3962: \fi
3963: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
3964: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
3965: \fi
3966: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
3967: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
3968: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
3969: % For example:
3970: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
3971: % @item @code{#}
3972: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
3973: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
3974: % marking characters.
3975: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
3976: }\cr
3977: }
3978: \def\Emultitable{%
3979: \crcr
3980: \egroup % end the \halign
3981: \global\setpercentfalse
3982: }
3983:
3984: \def\setmultitablespacing{%
3985: \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
3986: %
3987: % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
3988: % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
3989: % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
3990: % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
3991: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
3992: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
3993: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
3994: \fi
3995: % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
3996: % table. If not, do nothing.
3997: % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
3998: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
3999: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4000: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4001: % than skip between lines in the table.
4002: \fi%
4003: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
4004: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4005: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4006: % than skip between lines in the table.
4007: \fi}
4008:
4009:
4010: \message{conditionals,}
4011:
4012: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
4013: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
4014: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
4015: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4016: % attempt to close an environment group.
4017: %
4018: \def\makecond#1{%
4019: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
4020: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
4021: }
4022: \makecond{iftex}
4023: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
4024: \makecond{ifnothtml}
4025: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
4026: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
4027: \makecond{ifnotxml}
4028:
4029: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4030: %
4031: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
4032: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
4033: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
4034: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
4035: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
4036: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
4037: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
4038: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
4039: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
4040: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
4041: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
4042: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
4043: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
4044:
4045: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4046: %
4047: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4048: \newcount\doignorecount
4049:
4050: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4051: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4052: \obeylines
4053: \catcode`\@ = \other
4054: \catcode`\{ = \other
4055: \catcode`\} = \other
4056: %
4057: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4058: \spaceisspace
4059: %
4060: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4061: \doignorecount = 0
4062: %
4063: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4064: \dodoignore{#1}%
4065: }
4066:
4067: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4068: \obeylines %
4069: %
4070: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4071: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4072: %
4073: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4074: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
4075: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
4076: %
4077: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4078: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4079: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4080: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
4081: %
4082: % And now expand that command.
4083: \doignoretext ^^M%
4084: }%
4085: }
4086:
4087: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4088: \def\temp{#1}%
4089: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
4090: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4091: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
4092: \advance\doignorecount by 1
4093: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
4094: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4095: \fi
4096: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4097: }
4098:
4099: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4100: %
4101: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4102: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
4103: \let\next\enddoignore
4104: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
4105: \advance\doignorecount by -1
4106: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
4107: \fi
4108: \next
4109: }
4110:
4111: % Finish off ignored text.
4112: { \obeylines%
4113: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4114: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4115: % would result in a blank line in the output.
4116: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4117: }
4118:
4119:
4120: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4121: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4122: %
4123: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4124: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4125: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4126: % didn't need it.
4127: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4128: %
4129: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4130: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4131: {%
4132: \makevalueexpandable
4133: \def\temp{#2}%
4134: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
4135: \ifx\temp\empty
4136: \next{}%
4137: \else
4138: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
4139: \fi
4140: }%
4141: }
4142: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4143: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4144:
4145: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4146: %
4147: \parseargdef\clear{%
4148: {%
4149: \makevalueexpandable
4150: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
4151: }%
4152: }
4153:
4154: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4155: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4156: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4157: {
4158: \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
4159: %
4160: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4161: \let\value = \expandablevalue
4162: % We don't want these characters active, ...
4163: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
4164: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4165: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4166: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4167: \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
4168: }
4169: }
4170:
4171: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
4172: % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
4173: % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
4174: % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
4175: % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
4176: % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
4177: % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
4178: %
4179: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
4180: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4181: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
4182: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
4183: \else
4184: \csname SET#1\endcsname
4185: \fi
4186: }
4187:
4188: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4189: % with @set.
4190: %
4191: % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
4192: %
4193: \makecond{ifset}
4194: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4195: \def\doifset#1#2{%
4196: {%
4197: \makevalueexpandable
4198: \let\next=\empty
4199: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4200: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4201: \fi
4202: \expandafter
4203: }\next
4204: }
4205: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4206:
4207: % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
4208: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4209: %
4210: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4211: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4212: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4213: %
4214: \makecond{ifclear}
4215: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4216: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4217:
4218: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
4219: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
4220: \let\dircategory=\comment
4221:
4222: % @defininfoenclose.
4223: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
4224:
4225:
4226: \message{indexing,}
4227: % Index generation facilities
4228:
4229: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4230: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4231: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4232:
4233: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
4234: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
4235: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
4236: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4237: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
4238: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4239: % for the sake of vms.
4240: %
4241: \def\newindex#1{%
4242: \iflinks
4243: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4244: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
4245: \fi
4246: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
4247: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4248: }
4249:
4250: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
4251: %
4252: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4253:
4254: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4255: %
4256: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4257: %
4258: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
4259: \iflinks
4260: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4261: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
4262: \fi
4263: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4264: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4265: }
4266:
4267:
4268: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
4269: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4270: %
4271: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4272: % inside @code.
4273: %
4274: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4275: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4276:
4277: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4278: % #3 the target index (bar).
4279: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4280: % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4281: % closing the target index.
4282: \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
4283: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4284: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4285: \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
4286: \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
4287: \fi
4288: % redefine \fooindfile:
4289: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4290: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4291: % redefine \fooindex:
4292: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4293: }
4294:
4295: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
4296: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4297: % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
4298:
4299: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
4300: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
4301:
4302: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4303: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4304:
4305: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
4306: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4307:
4308: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4309: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
4310: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4311:
4312: % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4313: % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
4314: % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
4315: %
4316: \def\indexdummies{%
4317: \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
4318: \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4319: \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
4320: %
4321: % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
4322: % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
4323: % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4324: % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4325: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
4326: % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
4327: \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
4328: \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
4329: %
4330: % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
4331: % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
4332: % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
4333: % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
4334: % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
4335: % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
4336: % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
4337: % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
4338: % is still getting written without apparent harm.
4339: %
4340: % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
4341: % help-texinfo, 22may06):
4342: % @macro funindex {WORD}
4343: % @findex xyz
4344: % @end macro
4345: % ...
4346: % @funindex commtest
4347: %
4348: % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
4349: %
4350: % Sample whatsit resulting:
4351: % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
4352: %
4353: % So:
4354: \let\endinput = \empty
4355: %
4356: % Do the redefinitions.
4357: \commondummies
4358: }
4359:
4360: % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
4361: % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4362: % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
4363: % this will be simpler.
4364: %
4365: \def\atdummies{%
4366: \def\@{@@}%
4367: \def\ {@ }%
4368: \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
4369: \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
4370: %
4371: % Do the redefinitions.
4372: \commondummies
4373: \otherbackslash
4374: }
4375:
4376: % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4377: %
4378: \def\commondummies{%
4379: %
4380: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4381: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
4382: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4383: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4384: % from whatever follows.
4385: %
4386: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4387: % space.
4388: %
4389: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4390: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4391: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4392: %
4393: \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
4394: \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
4395: \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4396: %
4397: \commondummiesnofonts
4398: %
4399: \definedummyletter\_%
4400: \definedummyletter\-%
4401: %
4402: % Non-English letters.
4403: \definedummyword\AA
4404: \definedummyword\AE
4405: \definedummyword\DH
4406: \definedummyword\L
4407: \definedummyword\O
4408: \definedummyword\OE
4409: \definedummyword\TH
4410: \definedummyword\aa
4411: \definedummyword\ae
4412: \definedummyword\dh
4413: \definedummyword\exclamdown
4414: \definedummyword\l
4415: \definedummyword\o
4416: \definedummyword\oe
4417: \definedummyword\ordf
4418: \definedummyword\ordm
4419: \definedummyword\questiondown
4420: \definedummyword\ss
4421: \definedummyword\th
4422: %
4423: % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4424: \definedummyword\bf
4425: \definedummyword\gtr
4426: \definedummyword\hat
4427: \definedummyword\less
4428: \definedummyword\sf
4429: \definedummyword\sl
4430: \definedummyword\tclose
4431: \definedummyword\tt
4432: %
4433: \definedummyword\LaTeX
4434: \definedummyword\TeX
4435: %
4436: % Assorted special characters.
4437: \definedummyword\arrow
4438: \definedummyword\bullet
4439: \definedummyword\comma
4440: \definedummyword\copyright
4441: \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4442: \definedummyword\dots
4443: \definedummyword\enddots
4444: \definedummyword\entrybreak
4445: \definedummyword\equiv
4446: \definedummyword\error
4447: \definedummyword\euro
4448: \definedummyword\expansion
4449: \definedummyword\geq
4450: \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4451: \definedummyword\guillemetright
4452: \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4453: \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4454: \definedummyword\leq
4455: \definedummyword\minus
4456: \definedummyword\ogonek
4457: \definedummyword\pounds
4458: \definedummyword\point
4459: \definedummyword\print
4460: \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4461: \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4462: \definedummyword\quotedblright
4463: \definedummyword\quoteleft
4464: \definedummyword\quoteright
4465: \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4466: \definedummyword\result
4467: \definedummyword\textdegree
4468: %
4469: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4470: \macrolist
4471: %
4472: \normalturnoffactive
4473: %
4474: % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4475: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4476: \makevalueexpandable
4477: }
4478:
4479: % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4480: %
4481: \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4482: % Control letters and accents.
4483: \definedummyletter\!%
4484: \definedummyaccent\"%
4485: \definedummyaccent\'%
4486: \definedummyletter\*%
4487: \definedummyaccent\,%
4488: \definedummyletter\.%
4489: \definedummyletter\/%
4490: \definedummyletter\:%
4491: \definedummyaccent\=%
4492: \definedummyletter\?%
4493: \definedummyaccent\^%
4494: \definedummyaccent\`%
4495: \definedummyaccent\~%
4496: \definedummyword\u
4497: \definedummyword\v
4498: \definedummyword\H
4499: \definedummyword\dotaccent
4500: \definedummyword\ogonek
4501: \definedummyword\ringaccent
4502: \definedummyword\tieaccent
4503: \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4504: \definedummyword\udotaccent
4505: \definedummyword\dotless
4506: %
4507: % Texinfo font commands.
4508: \definedummyword\b
4509: \definedummyword\i
4510: \definedummyword\r
4511: \definedummyword\sansserif
4512: \definedummyword\sc
4513: \definedummyword\slanted
4514: \definedummyword\t
4515: %
4516: % Commands that take arguments.
4517: \definedummyword\acronym
4518: \definedummyword\anchor
4519: \definedummyword\cite
4520: \definedummyword\code
4521: \definedummyword\command
4522: \definedummyword\dfn
4523: \definedummyword\dmn
4524: \definedummyword\email
4525: \definedummyword\emph
4526: \definedummyword\env
4527: \definedummyword\file
4528: \definedummyword\indicateurl
4529: \definedummyword\kbd
4530: \definedummyword\key
4531: \definedummyword\math
4532: \definedummyword\option
4533: \definedummyword\pxref
4534: \definedummyword\ref
4535: \definedummyword\samp
4536: \definedummyword\strong
4537: \definedummyword\tie
4538: \definedummyword\uref
4539: \definedummyword\url
4540: \definedummyword\var
4541: \definedummyword\verb
4542: \definedummyword\w
4543: \definedummyword\xref
4544: }
4545:
4546: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4547: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
4548: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4549: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4550: %
4551: \def\indexnofonts{%
4552: % Accent commands should become @asis.
4553: \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
4554: % We can just ignore other control letters.
4555: \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
4556: % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
4557: \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4558: %
4559: \commondummiesnofonts
4560: %
4561: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4562: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4563: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4564: %\let\tt=\asis
4565: %
4566: \def\ { }%
4567: \def\@{@}%
4568: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4569: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
4570: %
4571: % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
4572: % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
4573: % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
4574: \def\{{|a}%
4575: \def\}{|b}%
4576: %
4577: % Non-English letters.
4578: \def\AA{AA}%
4579: \def\AE{AE}%
4580: \def\DH{DZZ}%
4581: \def\L{L}%
4582: \def\OE{OE}%
4583: \def\O{O}%
4584: \def\TH{ZZZ}%
4585: \def\aa{aa}%
4586: \def\ae{ae}%
4587: \def\dh{dzz}%
4588: \def\exclamdown{!}%
4589: \def\l{l}%
4590: \def\oe{oe}%
4591: \def\ordf{a}%
4592: \def\ordm{o}%
4593: \def\o{o}%
4594: \def\questiondown{?}%
4595: \def\ss{ss}%
4596: \def\th{zzz}%
4597: %
4598: \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
4599: \def\TeX{TeX}%
4600: %
4601: % Assorted special characters.
4602: % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4603: \def\arrow{->}%
4604: \def\bullet{bullet}%
4605: \def\comma{,}%
4606: \def\copyright{copyright}%
4607: \def\dots{...}%
4608: \def\enddots{...}%
4609: \def\equiv{==}%
4610: \def\error{error}%
4611: \def\euro{euro}%
4612: \def\expansion{==>}%
4613: \def\geq{>=}%
4614: \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
4615: \def\guillemetright{>>}%
4616: \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
4617: \def\guilsinglright{>}%
4618: \def\leq{<=}%
4619: \def\minus{-}%
4620: \def\point{.}%
4621: \def\pounds{pounds}%
4622: \def\print{-|}%
4623: \def\quotedblbase{"}%
4624: \def\quotedblleft{"}%
4625: \def\quotedblright{"}%
4626: \def\quoteleft{`}%
4627: \def\quoteright{'}%
4628: \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
4629: \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
4630: \def\result{=>}%
4631: \def\textdegree{o}%
4632: %
4633: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
4634: \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
4635: %
4636: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4637: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4638: % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4639: % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4640: % that starts with \.
4641: %
4642: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4643: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
4644: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4645: %
4646: \macrolist
4647: }
4648:
4649: % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
4650: % ignore left quotes in the sort term.
4651: {\catcode`\`=\active
4652: \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
4653:
4654: \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
4655: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4656:
4657: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4658: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4659: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4660:
4661: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
4662: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4663: % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4664: % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4665: %
4666: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4667: \iflinks
4668: {%
4669: % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4670: \toks0 = {#2}%
4671: % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4672: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
4673: \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4674: \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4675: \fi
4676: %
4677: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
4678: %
4679: \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4680: }%
4681: \fi
4682: }
4683:
4684: % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
4685: %
4686: \def\dosubindwrite{%
4687: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
4688: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
4689: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
4690: \fi
4691: %
4692: % Remember, we are within a group.
4693: \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
4694: \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
4695: % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
4696: %
4697: % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
4698: % get the string to sort by.
4699: {\indexnofonts
4700: \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
4701: \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
4702: }%
4703: %
4704: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
4705: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
4706: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
4707: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
4708: % sorted result.
4709: \edef\temp{%
4710: \write\writeto{%
4711: \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
4712: }%
4713: \temp
4714: }
4715:
4716: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
4717: %
4718: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
4719: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
4720: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
4721: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
4722: % sequences like this:
4723: % @end defun
4724: % @tindex whatever
4725: % @defun ...
4726: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
4727: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
4728: % the previous defun.
4729: %
4730: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
4731: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
4732: %
4733: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
4734: %
4735: % But wait, there is a catch there:
4736: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
4737: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
4738: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
4739: % representation of the skip.
4740: %
4741: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
4742: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
4743: %
4744: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
4745: %
4746: \newskip\whatsitskip
4747: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
4748: %
4749: % ..., ready, GO:
4750: %
4751: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
4752: #1%
4753: \else
4754: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
4755: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
4756: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
4757: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
4758: %
4759: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
4760: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
4761: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
4762: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
4763: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
4764: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4765: \else
4766: \vskip-\whatsitskip
4767: \fi
4768: %
4769: #1%
4770: %
4771: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4772: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
4773: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
4774: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
4775: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
4776: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
4777: % @deffn deffn-whatever
4778: % @vindex index-whatever
4779: % Description.
4780: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
4781: % and the "Description." paragraph.
4782: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
4783: \else
4784: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
4785: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
4786: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
4787: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
4788: \fi
4789: \fi}
4790:
4791: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
4792: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
4793: % or
4794: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
4795: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
4796: % containing these kinds of lines:
4797: % \initial {c}
4798: % before the first topic whose initial is c
4799: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
4800: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
4801: % \primary {topic}
4802: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
4803: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
4804: % for each subtopic.
4805:
4806: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
4807: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
4808:
4809: \def\findex {\fnindex}
4810: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
4811: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
4812: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
4813: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
4814: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
4815:
4816: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
4817: {\obeylines %
4818: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
4819: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
4820:
4821: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
4822:
4823: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
4824: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
4825: %
4826: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
4827: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
4828: %
4829: \smallfonts \rm
4830: \tolerance = 9500
4831: \plainfrenchspacing
4832: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
4833: %
4834: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
4835: % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
4836: % \initial {@}
4837: % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
4838: % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
4839: \catcode`\@ = 11
4840: \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
4841: \ifeof 1
4842: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
4843: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
4844: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
4845: % there is some text.
4846: \putwordIndexNonexistent
4847: \else
4848: %
4849: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
4850: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
4851: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
4852: \read 1 to \temp
4853: \ifeof 1
4854: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
4855: \else
4856: % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
4857: % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
4858: % to make right now.
4859: \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
4860: \catcode`\\ = 0
4861: \escapechar = `\\
4862: \begindoublecolumns
4863: \input \jobname.#1s
4864: \enddoublecolumns
4865: \fi
4866: \fi
4867: \closein 1
4868: \endgroup}
4869:
4870: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
4871: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
4872:
4873: \def\initial#1{{%
4874: % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
4875: \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
4876: %
4877: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
4878: \removelastskip
4879: %
4880: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
4881: \nobreak
4882: \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
4883: \penalty 0
4884: \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
4885: %
4886: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
4887: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
4888: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
4889: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
4890: %
4891: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
4892: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
4893: \leftline{\secbf #1}%
4894: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
4895: \nobreak
4896: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
4897: }}
4898:
4899: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
4900: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
4901: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
4902: %
4903: % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
4904: % \def\entry#1#2{...
4905: % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
4906: % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
4907: % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
4908: % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
4909: % --kasal, 21nov03
4910: \def\entry{%
4911: \begingroup
4912: %
4913: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
4914: % affect previous text.
4915: \par
4916: %
4917: % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
4918: \parfillskip = 0in
4919: %
4920: % No extra space above this paragraph.
4921: \parskip = 0in
4922: %
4923: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
4924: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
4925: %
4926: % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
4927: % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
4928: % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
4929: % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
4930: % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
4931: %
4932: % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
4933: % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
4934: \hangindent = 2em
4935: %
4936: % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
4937: % with blank space.
4938: \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
4939: %
4940: % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
4941: % columns.
4942: \vskip 0pt plus1pt
4943: %
4944: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
4945: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
4946: % titles, for instance.
4947: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
4948: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
4949: %
4950: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
4951: \afterassignment\doentry
4952: \let\temp =
4953: }
4954: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
4955: \def\doentry{%
4956: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
4957: \noindent
4958: \aftergroup\finishentry
4959: % And now comes the text of the entry.
4960: }
4961: \def\finishentry#1{%
4962: % #1 is the page number.
4963: %
4964: % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
4965: % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
4966: % cursed by a Unix daemon.
4967: \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
4968: \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
4969: \ %
4970: \else
4971: %
4972: % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
4973: % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
4974: % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
4975: \hfil\penalty50
4976: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
4977: %
4978: % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
4979: % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
4980: % \hbox ensues.
4981: \ifpdf
4982: \pdfgettoks#1.%
4983: \ \the\toksA
4984: \else
4985: \ #1%
4986: \fi
4987: \fi
4988: \par
4989: \endgroup
4990: }
4991:
4992: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
4993: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
4994: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
4995:
4996: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
4997:
4998: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
4999: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
5000: \parfillskip=0in
5001: \parskip=0in
5002: \hangindent=1in
5003: \hangafter=1
5004: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
5005: \ifpdf
5006: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
5007: \else
5008: #2
5009: \fi
5010: \par
5011: }}
5012:
5013: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5014: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5015: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5016: \catcode`\@=11
5017:
5018: \newbox\partialpage
5019: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5020:
5021: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5022: % Grab any single-column material above us.
5023: \output = {%
5024: %
5025: % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
5026: % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
5027: % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
5028: % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
5029: % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
5030: % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
5031: % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
5032: \ifvoid\partialpage \else
5033: \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
5034: \fi
5035: %
5036: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
5037: % Unvbox the main output page.
5038: \unvbox\PAGE
5039: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5040: }%
5041: }%
5042: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5043: %
5044: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5045: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
5046: %
5047: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
5048: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5049: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
5050: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5051: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5052: %
5053: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5054: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5055: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
5056: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5057: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5058: %
5059: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
5060: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5061: % been clobbered.
5062: %
5063: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
5064: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
5065: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
5066: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5067: %
5068: % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
5069: % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
5070: \vsize = 2\vsize
5071: }
5072:
5073: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5074: % the last.
5075: %
5076: \def\doublecolumnout{%
5077: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
5078: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5079: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5080: % previous page.
5081: \dimen@ = \vsize
5082: \divide\dimen@ by 2
5083: \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
5084: %
5085: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5086: \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
5087: \onepageout\pagesofar
5088: \unvbox255
5089: \penalty\outputpenalty
5090: }
5091: %
5092: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5093: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5094: \def\pagesofar{%
5095: \unvbox\partialpage
5096: %
5097: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5098: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
5099: \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
5100: }
5101: %
5102: % All done with double columns.
5103: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
5104: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5105: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
5106: % following situation:
5107: %
5108: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5109: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5110: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
5111: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5112: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
5113: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5114: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5115: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5116: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5117: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5118: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
5119: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5120: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5121: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5122: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5123: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5124: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5125: % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
5126: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5127: %
5128: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5129: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5130: \penalty0
5131: %
5132: \output = {%
5133: % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
5134: % current page, no automatic page break.
5135: \balancecolumns
5136: %
5137: % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
5138: % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
5139: % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5140: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5141: % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
5142: % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
5143: % the output somewhat more palatable.)
5144: \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
5145: }%
5146: \eject
5147: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5148: %
5149: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5150: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
5151: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
5152: % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
5153: \pagegoal = \vsize
5154: }
5155: %
5156: % Called at the end of the double column material.
5157: \def\balancecolumns{%
5158: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5159: \dimen@ = \ht0
5160: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
5161: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
5162: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
5163: %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
5164: \splittopskip = \topskip
5165: % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
5166: {%
5167: \vbadness = 10000
5168: \loop
5169: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
5170: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
5171: \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
5172: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
5173: \repeat
5174: }%
5175: %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
5176: \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
5177: \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
5178: %
5179: \pagesofar
5180: }
5181: \catcode`\@ = \other
5182:
5183:
5184: \message{sectioning,}
5185: % Chapters, sections, etc.
5186:
5187: % Let's start with @part.
5188: \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5189: \def\partzzz#1{%
5190: \chapoddpage
5191: \null
5192: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
5193: \begingroup
5194: \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
5195: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
5196: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5197: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
5198: \chapoddpage
5199: \endgroup
5200: }
5201:
5202: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
5203: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5204: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
5205: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
5206: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5207: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
5208: \newcount\chapno
5209: \newcount\secno \secno=0
5210: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
5211: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
5212:
5213: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5214: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
5215: %
5216: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5217: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5218: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5219: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5220: %
5221: \def\appendixletter{%
5222: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
5223: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
5224: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
5225: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
5226: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
5227: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
5228: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
5229: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
5230: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
5231: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5232: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5233: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5234: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5235: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5236: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5237: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5238: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5239: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5240: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5241: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5242: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5243: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5244: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5245: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5246: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5247: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5248: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5249: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
5250: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5251: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5252: \else\char\the\appendixno
5253: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5254: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5255:
5256: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5257: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
5258: % these. @section does likewise.
5259: \def\thischapter{}
5260: \def\thischapternum{}
5261: \def\thischaptername{}
5262: \def\thissection{}
5263: \def\thissectionnum{}
5264: \def\thissectionname{}
5265:
5266: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5267: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5268:
5269: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5270: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
5271: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
5272:
5273: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5274: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
5275: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
5276:
5277: % we only have subsub.
5278: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
5279: %
5280: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5281: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5282: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
5283: %
5284: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5285: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5286: \def\chapheadtype{N}
5287:
5288: % Choose a heading macro
5289: % #1 is heading type
5290: % #2 is heading level
5291: % #3 is text for heading
5292: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5293: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5294: \absseclevel=#2
5295: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
5296: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5297: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
5298: \absseclevel = 0
5299: \else
5300: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
5301: \absseclevel = 3
5302: \fi
5303: \fi
5304: % The heading type:
5305: \def\headtype{#1}%
5306: \if \headtype U%
5307: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
5308: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
5309: \fi
5310: \else
5311: % Check for appendix sections:
5312: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
5313: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5314: \else
5315: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
5316: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
5317: \fi\fi
5318: \fi
5319: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5320: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
5321: \def\headtype{U}%
5322: \else
5323: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
5324: \fi
5325: \fi
5326: % Now print the heading:
5327: \if \headtype U%
5328: \ifcase\absseclevel
5329: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
5330: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5331: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5332: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5333: \fi
5334: \else
5335: \if \headtype A%
5336: \ifcase\absseclevel
5337: \appendixzzz{#3}%
5338: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5339: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5340: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5341: \fi
5342: \else
5343: \ifcase\absseclevel
5344: \chapterzzz{#3}%
5345: \or \seczzz{#3}%
5346: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5347: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5348: \fi
5349: \fi
5350: \fi
5351: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5352: }
5353:
5354: % an interface:
5355: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
5356: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
5357: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
5358:
5359: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
5360: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5361: %
5362: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5363: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5364: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5365: %
5366: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5367: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
5368: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5369: % as an @include file.
5370: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5371: \global\advance\chapno by 1
5372: %
5373: % Used for \float.
5374: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
5375: \resetallfloatnos
5376: %
5377: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5378: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5379: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5380: %
5381: % Write the actual heading.
5382: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
5383: %
5384: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5385: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
5386: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5387: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5388: }
5389:
5390: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5391: %
5392: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
5393: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5394: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
5395: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
5396: \resetallfloatnos
5397: %
5398: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5399: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5400: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5401: %
5402: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
5403: %
5404: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
5405: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
5406: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
5407: }
5408:
5409: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
5410: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
5411: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5412: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5413: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
5414: %
5415: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5416: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5417: \resetallfloatnos
5418: %
5419: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5420: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5421: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5422: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5423: % to be executed, not expanded).
5424: %
5425: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5426: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
5427: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
5428: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
5429: % the toc entries.)
5430: \toks0 = {#1}%
5431: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
5432: %
5433: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
5434: %
5435: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
5436: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
5437: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
5438: }
5439:
5440: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
5441: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
5442: % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
5443: % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
5444: % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
5445: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
5446: \unnmhead0{#1}%
5447: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5448: }
5449:
5450: % @top is like @unnumbered.
5451: \let\top\unnumbered
5452:
5453: % Sections.
5454: %
5455: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
5456: \def\seczzz#1{%
5457: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5458: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
5459: }
5460:
5461: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
5462: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
5463: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
5464: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5465: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
5466: }
5467: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
5468:
5469: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
5470: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
5471: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
5472: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5473: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
5474: }
5475:
5476: % Subsections.
5477: %
5478: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
5479: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
5480: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
5481: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5482: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5483: }
5484:
5485: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
5486: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
5487: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
5488: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5489: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
5490: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5491: }
5492:
5493: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
5494: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
5495: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
5496: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5497: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
5498: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5499: }
5500:
5501: % Subsubsections.
5502: %
5503: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
5504: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
5505: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5506: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5507: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
5508: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5509: }
5510:
5511: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
5512: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
5513: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
5514: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5515: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
5516: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5517: }
5518:
5519: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
5520: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
5521: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5522: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5523: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
5524: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5525: }
5526:
5527: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
5528: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
5529: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
5530: \let\section = \numberedsec
5531: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5532: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5533:
5534: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
5535:
5536: % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
5537: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
5538: % overlong headings to fold.
5539: % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
5540: % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
5541: % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
5542: % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
5543:
5544: \def\majorheading{%
5545: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
5546: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
5547: }
5548:
5549: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
5550: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
5551: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5552: \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5553: \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
5554: \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
5555: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5556: }
5557:
5558: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
5559: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5560: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5561: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5562: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5563: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5564: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5565:
5566: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
5567: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
5568: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
5569:
5570: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
5571: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
5572:
5573: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
5574: \newskip\chapheadingskip
5575:
5576: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
5577: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
5578: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
5579: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
5580: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
5581: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
5582: \def\chapoddpage{%
5583: \chappager
5584: \ifodd\pageno \else
5585: \begingroup
5586: \headingsoff
5587: \null
5588: \chappager
5589: \endgroup
5590: \fi
5591: }
5592:
5593: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
5594:
5595: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
5596: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5597: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
5598: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
5599:
5600: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
5601: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5602: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
5603: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
5604: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
5605:
5606: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
5607: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
5608: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
5609: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
5610: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
5611:
5612: \CHAPPAGon
5613:
5614: % Chapter opening.
5615: %
5616: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
5617: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
5618: %
5619: % To test against our argument.
5620: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
5621: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
5622: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
5623: %
5624: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
5625: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5626: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5627: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5628: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5629: \gdef\thissection{}}%
5630: %
5631: \def\temptype{#2}%
5632: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5633: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5634: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
5635: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5636: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5637: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
5638: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5639: \toks0={#1}%
5640: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5641: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5642: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
5643: % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
5644: % commands in some of the translations.
5645: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
5646: \noexpand\thischapternum:
5647: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5648: }%
5649: \else
5650: \toks0={#1}%
5651: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5652: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5653: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
5654: % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
5655: % commands in some of the translations.
5656: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
5657: \noexpand\thischapternum:
5658: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5659: }%
5660: \fi\fi\fi
5661: %
5662: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5663: % the preceding space.
5664: \safewhatsit\domark
5665: %
5666: % Insert the chapter heading break.
5667: \pchapsepmacro
5668: %
5669: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5670: % between here and the heading.
5671: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5672: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5673: \domark
5674: %
5675: {%
5676: \chapfonts \rmisbold
5677: %
5678: % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
5679: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
5680: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
5681: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5682: %
5683: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
5684: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
5685: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5686: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5687: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
5688: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5689: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
5690: \def\toctype{omit}%
5691: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5692: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
5693: \def\toctype{app}%
5694: \else
5695: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
5696: \def\toctype{numchap}%
5697: \fi\fi\fi
5698: %
5699: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
5700: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
5701: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
5702: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
5703: %
5704: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
5705: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
5706: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
5707: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
5708: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
5709: \donoderef{#2}%
5710: %
5711: % Typeset the actual heading.
5712: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
5713: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5714: \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
5715: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
5716: }%
5717: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
5718: \nobreak
5719: }
5720:
5721: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
5722: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5723: \def\centerparameters{%
5724: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
5725: \leftskip = \rightskip
5726: \parfillskip = 0pt
5727: }
5728:
5729:
5730: % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
5731: % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
5732: %
5733: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
5734: %
5735: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
5736: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5737: \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5738: \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5739: }
5740: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
5741: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
5742: \par\penalty 5000 %
5743: }
5744: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
5745: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5746: \parindent=0pt
5747: \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5748: }
5749: \def\CHAPFopen{%
5750: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
5751: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
5752:
5753:
5754: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
5755: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
5756: %
5757: \newskip\secheadingskip
5758: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
5759:
5760: % Subsection titles.
5761: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
5762: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
5763:
5764: % Subsubsection titles.
5765: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
5766: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
5767:
5768:
5769: % Print any size, any type, section title.
5770: %
5771: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
5772: % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
5773: % section number.
5774: %
5775: \def\seckeyword{sec}
5776: %
5777: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
5778: {%
5779: \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
5780: %
5781: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
5782: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
5783: %
5784: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
5785: \def\temptype{#3}%
5786: %
5787: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5788: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5789: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5790: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5791: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5792: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
5793: \fi
5794: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5795: % Don't redefine \thissection.
5796: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5797: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5798: \toks0={#1}%
5799: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5800: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5801: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5802: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5803: % commands in some of the translations.
5804: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5805: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5806: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5807: }%
5808: \fi
5809: \else
5810: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5811: \toks0={#1}%
5812: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5813: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5814: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5815: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5816: % commands in some of the translations.
5817: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5818: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5819: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5820: }%
5821: \fi
5822: \fi\fi\fi
5823: %
5824: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
5825: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
5826: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
5827: \par
5828: %
5829: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5830: % the preceding space.
5831: \safewhatsit\domark
5832: %
5833: % Insert space above the heading.
5834: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
5835: %
5836: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5837: % between here and the heading.
5838: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5839: \domark
5840: %
5841: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
5842: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5843: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5844: \def\toctype{unn}%
5845: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5846: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5847: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
5848: % and don't redefine \lastsection.
5849: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5850: \def\toctype{omit}%
5851: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
5852: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5853: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5854: \def\toctype{app}%
5855: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5856: \else
5857: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5858: \def\toctype{num}%
5859: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5860: \fi\fi\fi
5861: %
5862: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
5863: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
5864: %
5865: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
5866: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
5867: \donoderef{#3}%
5868: %
5869: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
5870: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
5871: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
5872: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
5873: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
5874: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
5875: \nobreak
5876: %
5877: % Output the actual section heading.
5878: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5879: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
5880: \unhbox0 #1}%
5881: }%
5882: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
5883: % Don't allow stretch, though.
5884: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
5885: %
5886: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
5887: % was followed by glue.
5888: \nobreak
5889: %
5890: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
5891: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
5892: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
5893: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
5894: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
5895: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
5896: \vskip-\parskip
5897: %
5898: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
5899: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
5900: % and do the needful.
5901: \penalty 10001
5902: }
5903:
5904:
5905: \message{toc,}
5906: % Table of contents.
5907: \newwrite\tocfile
5908:
5909: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
5910: % Called from @chapter, etc.
5911: %
5912: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
5913: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
5914: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
5915: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
5916: % destination to jump to.
5917: %
5918: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
5919: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
5920: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
5921: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
5922: %
5923: \newif\iftocfileopened
5924: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
5925: %
5926: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
5927: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
5928: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
5929: \iftocfileopened\else
5930: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
5931: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
5932: \fi
5933: %
5934: \iflinks
5935: {\atdummies
5936: \edef\temp{%
5937: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
5938: \temp
5939: }%
5940: \fi
5941: \fi
5942: %
5943: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
5944: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
5945: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
5946: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
5947: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
5948: % `1', and two named `2'.
5949: \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
5950: }
5951:
5952:
5953: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
5954: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
5955: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
5956: %
5957: \def\activecatcodes{%
5958: \catcode`\"=\active
5959: \catcode`\$=\active
5960: \catcode`\<=\active
5961: \catcode`\>=\active
5962: \catcode`\\=\active
5963: \catcode`\^=\active
5964: \catcode`\_=\active
5965: \catcode`\|=\active
5966: \catcode`\~=\active
5967: }
5968:
5969:
5970: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
5971: \def\readtocfile{%
5972: \setupdatafile
5973: \activecatcodes
5974: \input \tocreadfilename
5975: }
5976:
5977: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
5978: \newcount\savepageno
5979: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
5980:
5981: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
5982: %
5983: \def\startcontents#1{%
5984: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
5985: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
5986: % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
5987: % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
5988: \contentsalignmacro
5989: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
5990: %
5991: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
5992: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
5993: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
5994: %
5995: \savepageno = \pageno
5996: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
5997: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
5998: \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
5999: %
6000: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6001: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
6002: }
6003:
6004: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
6005: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6006: %
6007: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
6008:
6009: % Normal (long) toc.
6010: %
6011: \def\contents{%
6012: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6013: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6014: \ifeof 1 \else
6015: \readtocfile
6016: \fi
6017: \vfill \eject
6018: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6019: \ifeof 1 \else
6020: \pdfmakeoutlines
6021: \fi
6022: \closein 1
6023: \endgroup
6024: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6025: \global\pageno = \savepageno
6026: }
6027:
6028: % And just the chapters.
6029: \def\summarycontents{%
6030: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6031: %
6032: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
6033: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
6034: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
6035: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
6036: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6037: \secfonts
6038: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
6039: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
6040: \rm
6041: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
6042: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
6043: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
6044: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
6045: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
6046: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6047: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6048: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6049: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6050: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6051: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6052: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6053: \ifeof 1 \else
6054: \readtocfile
6055: \fi
6056: \closein 1
6057: \vfill \eject
6058: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6059: \endgroup
6060: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6061: \global\pageno = \savepageno
6062: }
6063: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
6064:
6065: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6066: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6067: %
6068: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6069: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6070: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6071: % But use \hss just in case.
6072: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
6073: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
6074: %
6075: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6076: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
6077: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6078: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6079: % there are before deciding ...
6080: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
6081: }
6082:
6083: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
6084: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
6085: % The last argument is the page number.
6086: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
6087:
6088: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
6089: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6090: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6091: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
6092: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
6093: %
6094: % Parts, in the short toc.
6095: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6096: \penalty-300
6097: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
6098: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6099: }
6100:
6101: % Chapters, in the main contents.
6102: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6103: %
6104: % Chapters, in the short toc.
6105: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
6106: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6107: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
6108: }
6109:
6110: % Appendices, in the main contents.
6111: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6112: %
6113: \def\appendixbox#1{%
6114: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6115: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
6116: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6117: %
6118: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6119:
6120: % Unnumbered chapters.
6121: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
6122: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
6123:
6124: % Sections.
6125: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6126: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
6127: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
6128:
6129: % Subsections.
6130: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6131: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
6132: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6133:
6134: % And subsubsections.
6135: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6136: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
6137: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6138:
6139: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6140: % Same as \defaultparindent.
6141: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
6142:
6143: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
6144: % page number.
6145: %
6146: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6147: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6148: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
6149: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
6150: \begingroup
6151: \chapentryfonts
6152: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6153: \endgroup
6154: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
6155: }
6156:
6157: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6158: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
6159: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6160: \endgroup}
6161:
6162: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6163: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
6164: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6165: \endgroup}
6166:
6167: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6168: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
6169: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6170: \endgroup}
6171:
6172: % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
6173: \let\tocentry = \entry
6174:
6175: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
6176: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
6177:
6178: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6179: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6180:
6181: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
6182: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
6183: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6184: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6185:
6186:
6187: \message{environments,}
6188: % @foo ... @end foo.
6189:
6190: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
6191: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
6192: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
6193:
6194: \envdef\tex{%
6195: \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
6196: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
6197: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
6198: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
6199: \catcode `\%=14
6200: \catcode `\+=\other
6201: \catcode `\"=\other
6202: \catcode `\|=\other
6203: \catcode `\<=\other
6204: \catcode `\>=\other
6205: \catcode`\`=\other
6206: \catcode`\'=\other
6207: \escapechar=`\\
6208: %
6209: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
6210: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
6211: \mathactive
6212: %
6213: \let\b=\ptexb
6214: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
6215: \let\c=\ptexc
6216: \let\,=\ptexcomma
6217: \let\.=\ptexdot
6218: \let\dots=\ptexdots
6219: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
6220: \let\!=\ptexexclam
6221: \let\i=\ptexi
6222: \let\indent=\ptexindent
6223: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6224: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
6225: \let\+=\tabalign
6226: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
6227: \let\/=\ptexslash
6228: \let\*=\ptexstar
6229: \let\t=\ptext
6230: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
6231: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
6232: %
6233: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
6234: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
6235: \def\@{@}%
6236: }
6237: % There is no need to define \Etex.
6238:
6239: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
6240: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
6241: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
6242:
6243: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
6244: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
6245:
6246: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
6247: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
6248: % have any width.
6249: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
6250:
6251: % This space is always present above and below environments.
6252: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
6253:
6254: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
6255: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
6256: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
6257: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
6258: %
6259: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
6260: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6261: % \sectionheading, q.v.
6262: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
6263: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
6264: \endgraf
6265: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
6266: \removelastskip
6267: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6268: % or better ...
6269: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
6270: \vskip\envskipamount
6271: \fi
6272: \fi
6273: }}
6274:
6275: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
6276:
6277: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6278: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6279: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
6280:
6281: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6282: % environment contents.
6283: \font\circle=lcircle10
6284: \newdimen\circthick
6285: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6286: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6287: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
6288: %
6289: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6290: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
6291: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
6292: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
6293: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6294: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
6295: \hskip\rskip}}
6296: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6297: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
6298: \hskip\rskip}}
6299: %
6300: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6301:
6302: \envdef\cartouche{%
6303: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6304: \startsavinginserts
6305: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
6306: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
6307: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
6308: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
6309: \cartouter=\hsize
6310: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
6311: % side, and for 6pt waste from
6312: % each corner char, and rule thickness
6313: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
6314: % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
6315: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6316: %
6317: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
6318: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
6319: % collide with the section heading.
6320: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
6321: %
6322: \vbox\bgroup
6323: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
6324: \carttop
6325: \hbox\bgroup
6326: \hskip\lskip
6327: \vrule\kern3pt
6328: \vbox\bgroup
6329: \kern3pt
6330: \hsize=\cartinner
6331: \baselineskip=\normbskip
6332: \lineskip=\normlskip
6333: \parskip=\normpskip
6334: \vskip -\parskip
6335: \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
6336: }
6337: \def\Ecartouche{%
6338: \ifhmode\par\fi
6339: \kern3pt
6340: \egroup
6341: \kern3pt\vrule
6342: \hskip\rskip
6343: \egroup
6344: \cartbot
6345: \egroup
6346: \checkinserts
6347: }
6348:
6349:
6350: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6351: % inside a group.
6352: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
6353: \def\nonfillstart{%
6354: \aboveenvbreak
6355: \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
6356: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6357: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6358: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6359: \parskip = 0pt
6360: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6361: % the normal \indent.
6362: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
6363: \parindent = 0pt
6364: \let\indent\nonfillindent
6365: %
6366: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6367: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6368: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6369: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
6370: \else
6371: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6372: \fi
6373: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
6374: }
6375:
6376: \begingroup
6377: \obeyspaces
6378: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6379: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6380: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6381: % @indent.
6382: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6383: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6384: \ifx\temp %
6385: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6386: \else%
6387: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6388: \fi%
6389: }%
6390: \endgroup
6391: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6392: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6393:
6394: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6395: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6396: % This affects the following displayed environments:
6397: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6398: %
6399: \def\smallword{small}
6400: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
6401: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
6402: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
6403: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
6404: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
6405: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
6406: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
6407: % to change the fonts afterward.
6408: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6409: \smallexamplefonts \rm
6410: \fi
6411: }
6412: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
6413: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
6414: \else
6415: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6416: \smallexamplefonts \rm
6417: \fi
6418: }
6419:
6420: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
6421: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
6422: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
6423: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
6424: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
6425: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6426: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6427: }
6428:
6429: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
6430: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
6431: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
6432: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
6433: }
6434: %
6435: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
6436: % @example: same as @lisp.
6437: %
6438: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
6439: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
6440: %
6441: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
6442: \nonfillstart
6443: \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
6444: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
6445: \gobble % eat return
6446: }
6447: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
6448: %
6449: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
6450: \nonfillstart
6451: \gobble
6452: }
6453:
6454: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
6455: %
6456: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
6457: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6458: \nonfillstart
6459: \gobble
6460: }
6461:
6462: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
6463: \envdef\flushleft{%
6464: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6465: \nonfillstart
6466: \gobble
6467: }
6468: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
6469:
6470: % @flushright.
6471: %
6472: \envdef\flushright{%
6473: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6474: \nonfillstart
6475: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
6476: \gobble
6477: }
6478: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
6479:
6480:
6481: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
6482: % justification. From plain.tex.
6483: \envdef\raggedright{%
6484: \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
6485: }
6486: \let\Eraggedright\par
6487:
6488: \envdef\raggedleft{%
6489: \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
6490: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6491: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6492: % badness reporting.
6493: }
6494: \let\Eraggedleft\par
6495:
6496: \envdef\raggedcenter{%
6497: \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
6498: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6499: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6500: % badness reporting.
6501: }
6502: \let\Eraggedcenter\par
6503:
6504:
6505: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
6506: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
6507: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
6508: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
6509: %
6510: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
6511: %
6512: \def\quotationstart{%
6513: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
6514: \parindent=0pt
6515: %
6516: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
6517: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6518: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6519: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
6520: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
6521: \else
6522: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6523: \fi
6524: \parsearg\quotationlabel
6525: }
6526:
6527: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
6528: % doing normal filling.
6529: %
6530: \def\Equotation{%
6531: \par
6532: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
6533: % indent a bit.
6534: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
6535: \fi
6536: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6537: }
6538: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
6539:
6540: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
6541: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
6542: \def\temp{#1}%
6543: \ifx\temp\empty \else
6544: {\bf #1: }%
6545: \fi
6546: }
6547:
6548:
6549: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
6550: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
6551: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
6552: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
6553: %
6554: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
6555: %
6556: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
6557: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
6558: % verbatim line.
6559: \def\dospecials{%
6560: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
6561: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
6562: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
6563: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
6564: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
6565: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
6566: %\do\`\do\'%
6567: }
6568: %
6569: % [Knuth] p. 380
6570: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
6571: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
6572: %
6573: % Setup for the @verb command.
6574: %
6575: % Eight spaces for a tab
6576: \begingroup
6577: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6578: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
6579: \endgroup
6580: %
6581: \def\setupverb{%
6582: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6583: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
6584: \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
6585: \tabeightspaces
6586: % Respect line breaks,
6587: % print special symbols as themselves, and
6588: % make each space count
6589: % must do in this order:
6590: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6591: }
6592:
6593: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
6594: %
6595: % Real tab expansion.
6596: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
6597: %
6598: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
6599: % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
6600: % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
6601: % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
6602: % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
6603: % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
6604: \newbox\verbbox
6605: \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
6606: %
6607: \begingroup
6608: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6609: \gdef\tabexpand{%
6610: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6611: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
6612: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
6613: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
6614: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
6615: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
6616: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
6617: }%
6618: }
6619: \endgroup
6620:
6621: % start the verbatim environment.
6622: \def\setupverbatim{%
6623: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6624: \nonfillstart
6625: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6626: % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
6627: % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
6628: \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
6629: \tabexpand
6630: \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
6631: % Respect line breaks,
6632: % print special symbols as themselves, and
6633: % make each space count.
6634: % Must do in this order:
6635: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6636: \everypar{\starttabbox}%
6637: }
6638:
6639: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
6640: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
6641: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
6642: %
6643: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
6644: %
6645: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
6646: \begingroup
6647: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
6648: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
6649: \endgroup
6650: %
6651: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
6652: %
6653: %
6654: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
6655: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
6656: %
6657: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
6658: %
6659: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
6660: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
6661: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
6662: %
6663: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
6664: %
6665: \begingroup
6666: \catcode`\ =\active
6667: \obeylines %
6668: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
6669: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
6670: % line in the output.
6671: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
6672: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
6673: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
6674: \endgroup
6675: %
6676: \envdef\verbatim{%
6677: \setupverbatim\doverbatim
6678: }
6679: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
6680:
6681:
6682: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
6683: %
6684: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
6685: %
6686: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
6687: {%
6688: \makevalueexpandable
6689: \setupverbatim
6690: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
6691: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
6692: \input #1
6693: \afterenvbreak
6694: }%
6695: }
6696:
6697: % @copying ... @end copying.
6698: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
6699: %
6700: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
6701: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
6702: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
6703: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
6704: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
6705: % possible is very desirable.
6706: %
6707: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
6708: \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
6709: %
6710: \def\insertcopying{%
6711: \begingroup
6712: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
6713: \scanexp\copyingtext
6714: \endgroup
6715: }
6716:
6717:
6718: \message{defuns,}
6719: % @defun etc.
6720:
6721: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
6722: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
6723: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
6724: \newcount\defunpenalty
6725:
6726: % Start the processing of @deffn:
6727: \def\startdefun{%
6728: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
6729: \medbreak
6730: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
6731: % following @def command, see below.
6732: \else
6733: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
6734: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
6735: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
6736: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
6737: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
6738: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
6739: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
6740: %
6741: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
6742: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
6743: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
6744: % @def command.
6745: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6746: %
6747: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
6748: % But do insert the glue.
6749: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
6750: \fi
6751: %
6752: \parindent=0in
6753: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
6754: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6755: }
6756:
6757: \def\dodefunx#1{%
6758: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
6759: \checkenv#1%
6760: %
6761: % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
6762: % It's not a great place, though.
6763: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6764: %
6765: % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
6766: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
6767: }
6768: \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
6769:
6770: % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
6771: %
6772: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
6773: \begingroup
6774: % call \deffnheader:
6775: #1#2 \endheader
6776: % common ending:
6777: \interlinepenalty = 10000
6778: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
6779: \endgraf
6780: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
6781: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
6782: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
6783: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
6784: \checkparencounts
6785: \endgroup
6786: }
6787:
6788: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
6789:
6790: % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
6791: % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
6792: %
6793: \def\makedefun#1{%
6794: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
6795: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
6796: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
6797: \temp
6798: }
6799:
6800: % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
6801: %
6802: % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
6803: % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
6804: %
6805: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
6806: \envdef#1{%
6807: \startdefun
6808: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
6809: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
6810: }%
6811: \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
6812: \def#3%
6813: }
6814:
6815: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
6816: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
6817:
6818: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
6819: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
6820: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
6821: %
6822: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
6823: \def\temp{#1}%
6824: \ifx\temp\onword
6825: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6826: = \empty
6827: \else\ifx\temp\offword
6828: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6829: = \relax
6830: \else
6831: \errhelp = \EMsimple
6832: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
6833: must be on|off}%
6834: \fi\fi
6835: }
6836:
6837: % Untyped functions:
6838:
6839: % @deffn category name args
6840: \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
6841:
6842: % @deffn category class name args
6843: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6844:
6845: % \defopon {category on}class name args
6846: \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6847:
6848: % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
6849: %
6850: \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
6851: % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
6852: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
6853: \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
6854: }
6855:
6856: % Typed functions:
6857:
6858: % @deftypefn category type name args
6859: \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
6860:
6861: % @deftypeop category class type name args
6862: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6863:
6864: % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
6865: \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6866:
6867: % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
6868: %
6869: \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6870: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6871: \doingtypefntrue
6872: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6873: }
6874:
6875: % Typed variables:
6876:
6877: % @deftypevr category type var args
6878: \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
6879:
6880: % @deftypecv category class type var args
6881: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6882:
6883: % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
6884: \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6885:
6886: % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
6887: %
6888: \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6889: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6890: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6891: }
6892:
6893: % Untyped variables:
6894:
6895: % @defvr category var args
6896: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
6897:
6898: % @defcv category class var args
6899: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6900:
6901: % \defcvof {category of}class var args
6902: \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
6903:
6904: % Types:
6905:
6906: % @deftp category name args
6907: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
6908: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
6909: \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
6910: }
6911:
6912: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
6913: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6914: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
6915: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
6916: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6917: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6918: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
6919: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6920: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
6921: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
6922: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6923: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6924:
6925: % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
6926: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
6927: % #2 is the return type, if any.
6928: % #3 is the function name.
6929: %
6930: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
6931: %
6932: \def\defname#1#2#3{%
6933: \par
6934: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
6935: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
6936: %
6937: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
6938: % on a line by itself.
6939: \rettypeownlinefalse
6940: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
6941: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
6942: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
6943: \rettypeownlinetrue
6944: \fi
6945: \fi
6946: %
6947: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
6948: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
6949: % just below it.
6950: \def\temp{#1}%
6951: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
6952: %
6953: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
6954: % least two.
6955: \tempnum = 2
6956: %
6957: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
6958: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
6959: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
6960: %
6961: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
6962: \ifrettypeownline
6963: \advance\tempnum by 1
6964: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
6965: \else
6966: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
6967: \fi
6968: %
6969: % The continuations:
6970: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
6971: %
6972: % The final paragraph shape:
6973: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
6974: %
6975: % Put the category name at the right margin.
6976: \noindent
6977: \hbox to 0pt{%
6978: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
6979: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
6980: \kern\leftskip
6981: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
6982: }%
6983: %
6984: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
6985: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
6986: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6987: {%
6988: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
6989: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
6990: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
6991: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
6992: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
6993: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
6994: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
6995: % one has made identifiers using them :).
6996: \df \tt
6997: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
6998: \ifx\temp\empty\else
6999: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7000: \ifrettypeownline
7001: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7002: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
7003: \else
7004: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7005: \fi
7006: \fi % no return type
7007: #3% output function name
7008: }%
7009: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
7010: %
7011: \boldbrax
7012: % arguments will be output next, if any.
7013: }
7014:
7015: % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
7016: % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
7017: % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
7018: % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
7019: %
7020: \def\defunargs#1{%
7021: % use sl by default (not ttsl),
7022: % tt for the names.
7023: \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
7024: %
7025: % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
7026: % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
7027: \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
7028: #1%
7029: \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
7030: }
7031:
7032: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7033: %
7034: \def\activeparens{%
7035: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
7036: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
7037: \catcode`\&=\active
7038: }
7039:
7040: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7041: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
7042:
7043: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
7044: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7045: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7046: {
7047: \activeparens
7048: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
7049: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
7050: \global\let& = \&
7051:
7052: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
7053: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
7054: }
7055:
7056: \newcount\parencount
7057:
7058: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7059: \newif\ifampseen
7060: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
7061:
7062: \def\parenfont{%
7063: \ifampseen
7064: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7065: % otherwise use the default font.
7066: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
7067: \else
7068: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7069: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7070: \sf
7071: \fi
7072: }
7073: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
7074: \ifampseen
7075: \ifnum\parencount=1
7076: #1%
7077: \fi
7078: \fi
7079: }
7080: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7081:
7082: \def\opnr{%
7083: \global\advance\parencount by 1
7084: {\parenfont(}%
7085: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7086: }
7087: \def\clnr{%
7088: {\parenfont)}%
7089: \infirstlevel \sl
7090: \global\advance\parencount by -1
7091: }
7092:
7093: \newcount\brackcount
7094: \def\lbrb{%
7095: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
7096: {\bf[}%
7097: }
7098: \def\rbrb{%
7099: {\bf]}%
7100: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
7101: }
7102:
7103: \def\checkparencounts{%
7104: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
7105: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7106: }
7107: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7108: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
7109: \def\badparencount{%
7110: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
7111: \global\parencount=0
7112: }
7113: \def\badbrackcount{%
7114: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
7115: \global\brackcount=0
7116: }
7117:
7118:
7119: \message{macros,}
7120: % @macro.
7121:
7122: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
7123: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
7124: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7125: \newwrite\macscribble
7126: \def\scantokens#1{%
7127: \toks0={#1}%
7128: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
7129: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
7130: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
7131: \input \jobname.tmp
7132: }
7133: \fi
7134:
7135: \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
7136: \newlinechar`\^^M
7137: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
7138: %
7139: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
7140: % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
7141: % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
7142: % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
7143: % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
7144: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
7145: %
7146: % ... and for \example:
7147: \spaceisspace
7148: %
7149: % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
7150: % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
7151: % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
7152: % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
7153: % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
7154: % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
7155: % line-oriented commands.
7156: %
7157: \scantokens{#1\empty}%
7158: \endgroup}
7159:
7160: \def\scanexp#1{%
7161: \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
7162: \temp
7163: }
7164:
7165: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
7166: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
7167: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
7168:
7169: % List of all defined macros in the form
7170: % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
7171: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
7172: % if there is a need.
7173: \def\macrolist{}
7174:
7175: % Add the macro to \macrolist
7176: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
7177: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
7178: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
7179: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
7180: }
7181:
7182: % Utility routines.
7183: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
7184: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
7185: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
7186: %
7187: \def\cslet#1#2{%
7188: \expandafter\let
7189: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
7190: \csname#2\endcsname
7191: }
7192:
7193: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
7194: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
7195: {\catcode`\@=11
7196: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
7197: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
7198: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
7199: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
7200: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
7201: }
7202:
7203: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
7204: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
7205: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
7206: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
7207: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
7208: }
7209:
7210: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
7211: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
7212: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
7213: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
7214: %
7215: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
7216: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
7217: % confine the change to the current group.
7218: %
7219: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
7220: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
7221: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
7222: %
7223: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
7224: \catcode`\"=\other
7225: \catcode`\+=\other
7226: \catcode`\<=\other
7227: \catcode`\>=\other
7228: \catcode`\@=\other
7229: \catcode`\^=\other
7230: \catcode`\_=\other
7231: \catcode`\|=\other
7232: \catcode`\~=\other
7233: \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
7234: }
7235:
7236: \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
7237: \scanctxt
7238: \catcode`\\=\other
7239: \catcode`\^^M=\other
7240: }
7241:
7242: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
7243: \scanctxt
7244: \catcode`\{=\other
7245: \catcode`\}=\other
7246: \catcode`\^^M=\other
7247: \usembodybackslash
7248: }
7249:
7250: \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
7251: \scanctxt
7252: \catcode`\\=0
7253: }
7254: % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
7255: % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
7256: % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
7257: %
7258: % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
7259: % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
7260: % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
7261: %
7262: \def\\{\normalbackslash}%
7263: %
7264: % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
7265: % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
7266: % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
7267: %
7268: % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
7269:
7270:
7271: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
7272: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
7273: % where N is the macro parameter number.
7274: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
7275: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
7276: %
7277: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
7278: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
7279: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
7280: }
7281: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
7282:
7283: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
7284:
7285: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
7286: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
7287:
7288: \def\macroxxx#1{%
7289: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
7290: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
7291: \paramno=0\relax
7292: \else
7293: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
7294: \if\paramno>256\relax
7295: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7296: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7297: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
7298: \fi
7299: \fi
7300: \fi
7301: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
7302: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
7303: \else
7304: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
7305: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
7306: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
7307: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
7308: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
7309: \fi
7310: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
7311: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
7312: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
7313: \fi}
7314:
7315: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
7316: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
7317: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
7318: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
7319: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
7320: \begingroup
7321: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
7322: \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
7323: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
7324: \endgroup
7325: \else
7326: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
7327: \fi
7328: }
7329:
7330: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
7331: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
7332: %
7333: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
7334: \ifx #1\relax
7335: % remove this
7336: \else
7337: \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
7338: \fi
7339: }
7340:
7341: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
7342: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
7343: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
7344: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
7345: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
7346: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
7347: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
7348:
7349: % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
7350: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
7351: \catcode `@=11\relax
7352:
7353: % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
7354: % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
7355: % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If
7356: % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
7357: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
7358: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
7359: %
7360: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
7361: %
7362: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
7363: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
7364: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
7365: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
7366: %
7367: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
7368: % the macro is used.
7369: %
7370: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
7371: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
7372: % processed again to replace the arguments.
7373: %
7374: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
7375: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
7376: % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
7377: %
7378: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
7379: % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
7380: % error is produced.
7381: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
7382: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
7383: \let\hash\relax
7384: \let\xeatspaces\relax
7385: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
7386: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
7387: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
7388: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
7389: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
7390: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
7391: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
7392: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
7393: \paramno0\relax
7394: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
7395: \fi
7396: }
7397: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
7398: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7399: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
7400: \advance\paramno by 1
7401: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
7402: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
7403: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
7404: \fi\next}
7405:
7406: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
7407: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7408: \else
7409: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
7410: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
7411: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
7412: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
7413: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
7414: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
7415: % \xdef .
7416: \expandafter\edef\tempa
7417: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
7418: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7419: \fi\next}
7420:
7421: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
7422: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
7423: %
7424:
7425: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
7426: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
7427: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7428: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
7429: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7430: \catcode `\@=11\relax
7431:
7432: \let\endargs@\relax
7433: \let\nil@\relax
7434: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
7435: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
7436:
7437: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
7438: % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
7439: % macarg.ARGNAME
7440: %
7441: % #1 is the macro name
7442: % #2 is the list of argument names
7443: % #3 is the list of argument values
7444: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
7445: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
7446: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
7447: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
7448: \def\macroname{#1}%
7449: \begingroup
7450: \macroargctxt
7451: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
7452: \def\@tempa{#3}%
7453: \ifx\@tempa\empty
7454: \setemptyargvalues@
7455: \else
7456: \getargvals@@
7457: \fi
7458: }
7459:
7460: %
7461: \def\getargvals@@{%
7462: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7463: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
7464: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7465: \else
7466: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7467: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
7468: \fi
7469: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7470: \else
7471: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7472: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
7473: % macros to empty.
7474: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7475: \else
7476: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
7477: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
7478: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
7479: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
7480: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
7481: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
7482: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
7483: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
7484: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7485: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
7486: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
7487: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
7488: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
7489: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
7490: \let\next\getargvals@@
7491: \fi
7492: \fi
7493: \next
7494: }
7495:
7496: \def\push@#1#2{%
7497: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
7498: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
7499: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
7500: \expandafter#1#2}%
7501: }
7502:
7503: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
7504: % in macro \@tempa
7505: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
7506: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
7507: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
7508: % values into respective token registers.
7509: %
7510: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
7511: \begingroup
7512: \paramno0\relax
7513: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
7514: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
7515: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
7516: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
7517: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
7518: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
7519: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
7520: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
7521: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
7522: % group.
7523: \expandafter
7524: \endgroup
7525: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7526: }
7527:
7528: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
7529: %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
7530: \expandafter
7531: \endgroup
7532: \macargdeflist@
7533: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
7534: % is in \@tempa .
7535: \macvalstoargs@
7536: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
7537: % with \@tempb .
7538: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
7539: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
7540: % \egroup .
7541: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
7542: \let\@tempc\relax
7543: \else
7544: \let\@tempc\egroup
7545: \fi
7546: % And now we do the real job:
7547: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
7548: \@tempd
7549: }
7550:
7551: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
7552: \if#1;\let\next\relax
7553: \else
7554: \let\next\putargsintokens@
7555: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
7556: % alias \@tempb .
7557: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
7558: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
7559: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
7560: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
7561: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7562: \fi
7563: \next
7564: }
7565:
7566: % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
7567: \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
7568: % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
7569: \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
7570: % newtoks that can be used non \outer .
7571: \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
7572:
7573: % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
7574: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
7575: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7576: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7577: \else
7578: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
7579: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7580: \fi
7581: \next
7582: }
7583:
7584: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
7585: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
7586: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
7587: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
7588: \def\paramlist{#2}%
7589: }
7590:
7591: % #1 is the element target macro
7592: % #2 is the list macro
7593: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
7594: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7595: \def#1{#3}%
7596: \def#2{#4}%
7597: }
7598: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7599: \long\def#1{#3}%
7600: \long\def#2{#4}%
7601: }
7602:
7603: % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
7604: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
7605: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
7606: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
7607: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
7608: %
7609: \def\defmacro{%
7610: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
7611: \ifrecursive
7612: \ifcase\paramno
7613: % 0
7614: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7615: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7616: \or % 1
7617: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7618: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7619: \noexpand\braceorline
7620: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7621: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7622: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7623: \else
7624: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
7625: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7626: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7627: \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7628: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7629: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7630: \expandafter\expandafter
7631: \expandafter\xdef
7632: \expandafter\expandafter
7633: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7634: \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7635: \else % 10 or more
7636: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7637: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7638: }%
7639: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7640: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
7641: \fi
7642: \fi
7643: \else
7644: \ifcase\paramno
7645: % 0
7646: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7647: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7648: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7649: \or % 1
7650: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7651: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7652: \noexpand\braceorline
7653: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7654: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7655: \egroup
7656: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7657: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7658: \else % at most 9
7659: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
7660: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7661: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7662: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7663: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7664: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7665: \expandafter\expandafter
7666: \expandafter\xdef
7667: \expandafter\expandafter
7668: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7669: \paramlist{%
7670: \egroup
7671: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7672: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7673: \else % 10 or more:
7674: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7675: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7676: }%
7677: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7678: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
7679: \fi
7680: \fi
7681: \fi}
7682:
7683: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
7684:
7685: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
7686:
7687: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
7688: % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
7689: % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
7690: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
7691: %
7692: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
7693: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
7694: \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
7695: \expandafter\parsearg
7696: \fi \macnamexxx}
7697:
7698:
7699: % @alias.
7700: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
7701: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
7702: %
7703: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
7704: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
7705: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
7706: {%
7707: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
7708: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
7709: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
7710: }%
7711: \next
7712: }
7713:
7714:
7715: \message{cross references,}
7716:
7717: \newwrite\auxfile
7718: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
7719: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
7720:
7721: % @inforef is relatively simple.
7722: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
7723: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
7724: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
7725: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
7726:
7727: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
7728: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
7729: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
7730: % @node foo , bar , ...
7731: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
7732: %
7733: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
7734: %
7735: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
7736: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
7737: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
7738: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
7739:
7740: \let\nwnode=\node
7741: \let\lastnode=\empty
7742:
7743: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
7744: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
7745: %
7746: \def\donoderef#1{%
7747: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
7748: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
7749: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
7750: \fi
7751: }
7752:
7753: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
7754: %
7755: \newcount\savesfregister
7756: %
7757: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
7758: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
7759: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
7760:
7761: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
7762: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
7763: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
7764: % or the anchor name.
7765: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
7766: % empty for anchors.
7767: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
7768: %
7769: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
7770: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
7771: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
7772: %
7773: \def\setref#1#2{%
7774: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
7775: \iflinks
7776: {%
7777: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
7778: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
7779: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
7780: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
7781: }%
7782: \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
7783: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
7784: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
7785: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
7786: }%
7787: \fi
7788: }
7789:
7790: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
7791: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
7792: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
7793: % variable, now it's official.
7794: %
7795: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
7796: \def\temp{#1}%
7797: \ifx\temp\onword
7798: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7799: = \empty
7800: \else\ifx\temp\offword
7801: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7802: = \relax
7803: \else
7804: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7805: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
7806: must be on|off}%
7807: \fi\fi
7808: }
7809:
7810:
7811: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
7812: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
7813: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
7814: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
7815: %
7816: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7817: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7818: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7819: %
7820: \newbox\topbox
7821: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
7822: \newbox\printedmanualbox
7823: %
7824: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
7825: \unsepspaces
7826: %
7827: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
7828: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
7829: %
7830: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
7831: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
7832: %
7833: % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
7834: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
7835: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7836: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
7837: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
7838: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
7839: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7840: \else
7841: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
7842: % the square brackets if we have it.
7843: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7844: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
7845: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7846: \else
7847: \ifhavexrefs
7848: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
7849: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
7850: \else
7851: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
7852: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7853: \fi%
7854: \fi
7855: \fi
7856: \fi
7857: %
7858: % Make link in pdf output.
7859: \ifpdf
7860: {\indexnofonts
7861: \turnoffactive
7862: \makevalueexpandable
7863: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
7864: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
7865: \getfilename{#4}%
7866: %
7867: \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
7868: \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest
7869: %
7870: \leavevmode
7871: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
7872: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
7873: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
7874: \else
7875: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
7876: \fi
7877: }%
7878: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
7879: \fi
7880: %
7881: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
7882: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
7883: % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
7884: {%
7885: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
7886: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
7887: \indexnofonts
7888: \turnoffactive
7889: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
7890: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
7891: }%
7892: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
7893: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
7894: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
7895: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7896: \refx{#1-snt}{}%
7897: \else
7898: \printedrefname
7899: \fi
7900: %
7901: % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
7902: % "in MANUALNAME".
7903: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7904: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
7905: \fi
7906: \else
7907: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
7908: %
7909: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
7910: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
7911: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
7912: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
7913: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
7914: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
7915: %
7916: % Cross-manual reference. Only include the "Section ``foo'' in" if
7917: % the foo is neither missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual}
7918: % outputs simply "see The Foo Manual".
7919: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7920: % What is the 7sp about? The idea is that we also want to omit
7921: % the Section part if we would be printing "Top", since they are
7922: % clearly trying to refer to the whole manual. But, this being
7923: % TeX, we can't easily compare strings while ignoring the possible
7924: % spaces before and after in the input. By adding the arbitrary
7925: % 7sp, we make it much less likely that a real node name would
7926: % happen to have the same width as "Top" (e.g., in a monospaced font).
7927: % I hope it will never happen in practice.
7928: %
7929: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
7930: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
7931: %
7932: \setbox\topbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
7933: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
7934: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp
7935: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\topbox \else
7936: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
7937: \fi
7938: \fi
7939: \cite{\printedmanual}%
7940: \else
7941: % Reference in this manual.
7942: %
7943: % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
7944: % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
7945: % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
7946: % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
7947: % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
7948: {\turnoffactive
7949: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
7950: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
7951: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
7952: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
7953: }%
7954: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
7955: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
7956: %
7957: % But we always want a comma and a space:
7958: ,\space
7959: %
7960: % output the `page 3'.
7961: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
7962: \fi
7963: \fi
7964: \endlink
7965: \endgroup}
7966:
7967: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
7968: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
7969: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
7970: % one that Bob is working on :).
7971: %
7972: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
7973:
7974: % Things referred to by \setref.
7975: %
7976: \def\Ynothing{}
7977: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
7978: \def\Ynumbered{%
7979: \ifnum\secno=0
7980: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
7981: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
7982: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
7983: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
7984: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
7985: \else
7986: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
7987: \fi\fi\fi
7988: }
7989: \def\Yappendix{%
7990: \ifnum\secno=0
7991: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
7992: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
7993: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
7994: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
7995: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
7996: \else
7997: \putwordSection@tie
7998: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
7999: \fi\fi\fi
8000: }
8001:
8002: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
8003: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
8004: %
8005: \def\refx#1#2{%
8006: {%
8007: \indexnofonts
8008: \otherbackslash
8009: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
8010: \csname XR#1\endcsname
8011: }%
8012: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
8013: % If not defined, say something at least.
8014: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
8015: \iflinks
8016: \ifhavexrefs
8017: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
8018: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
8019: \else
8020: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
8021: \global\warnedxrefstrue
8022: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
8023: \fi
8024: \fi
8025: \fi
8026: \else
8027: % It's defined, so just use it.
8028: \thisrefX
8029: \fi
8030: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
8031: }
8032:
8033: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
8034: % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
8035: % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
8036: %
8037: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
8038: {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
8039: % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
8040: % mess up the control sequence name.
8041: \indexnofonts
8042: \turnoffactive
8043: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
8044: }%
8045: %
8046: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
8047: %
8048: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
8049: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
8050: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
8051: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
8052: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
8053: %
8054: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
8055: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
8056: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
8057: \else
8058: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
8059: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
8060: \fi
8061: %
8062: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
8063: % for later use in \listoffloats.
8064: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
8065: {\safexrefname}}%
8066: \fi
8067: }
8068:
8069: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
8070: %
8071: \def\tryauxfile{%
8072: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
8073: \ifeof 1 \else
8074: \readdatafile{aux}%
8075: \global\havexrefstrue
8076: \fi
8077: \closein 1
8078: }
8079:
8080: \def\setupdatafile{%
8081: \catcode`\^^@=\other
8082: \catcode`\^^A=\other
8083: \catcode`\^^B=\other
8084: \catcode`\^^C=\other
8085: \catcode`\^^D=\other
8086: \catcode`\^^E=\other
8087: \catcode`\^^F=\other
8088: \catcode`\^^G=\other
8089: \catcode`\^^H=\other
8090: \catcode`\^^K=\other
8091: \catcode`\^^L=\other
8092: \catcode`\^^N=\other
8093: \catcode`\^^P=\other
8094: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
8095: \catcode`\^^R=\other
8096: \catcode`\^^S=\other
8097: \catcode`\^^T=\other
8098: \catcode`\^^U=\other
8099: \catcode`\^^V=\other
8100: \catcode`\^^W=\other
8101: \catcode`\^^X=\other
8102: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
8103: \catcode`\^^[=\other
8104: \catcode`\^^\=\other
8105: \catcode`\^^]=\other
8106: \catcode`\^^^=\other
8107: \catcode`\^^_=\other
8108: % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
8109: % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
8110: % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
8111: % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
8112: % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
8113: % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
8114: % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
8115: % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
8116: %
8117: % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
8118: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
8119: % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
8120: %
8121: \catcode`\^=\other
8122: %
8123: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
8124: \catcode`\~=\other
8125: \catcode`\[=\other
8126: \catcode`\]=\other
8127: \catcode`\"=\other
8128: \catcode`\_=\other
8129: \catcode`\|=\other
8130: \catcode`\<=\other
8131: \catcode`\>=\other
8132: \catcode`\$=\other
8133: \catcode`\#=\other
8134: \catcode`\&=\other
8135: \catcode`\%=\other
8136: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
8137: %
8138: % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
8139: % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
8140: % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
8141: % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
8142: % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
8143: % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
8144: % now. --karl, 15jan04.
8145: \catcode`\\=\other
8146: %
8147: % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
8148: {%
8149: \count1=128
8150: \def\loop{%
8151: \catcode\count1=\other
8152: \advance\count1 by 1
8153: \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
8154: }%
8155: }%
8156: %
8157: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
8158: \catcode`\{=1
8159: \catcode`\}=2
8160: \catcode`\@=0
8161: }
8162:
8163: \def\readdatafile#1{%
8164: \begingroup
8165: \setupdatafile
8166: \input\jobname.#1
8167: \endgroup}
8168:
8169:
8170: \message{insertions,}
8171: % including footnotes.
8172:
8173: \newcount \footnoteno
8174:
8175: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
8176: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
8177: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
8178: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
8179: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
8180: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
8181:
8182: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
8183: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
8184:
8185: {\catcode `\@=11
8186: %
8187: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
8188: \gdef\footnote{%
8189: \let\indent=\ptexindent
8190: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
8191: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
8192: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
8193: %
8194: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
8195: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
8196: \let\@sf\empty
8197: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
8198: %
8199: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
8200: \unskip
8201: \thisfootno\@sf
8202: \dofootnote
8203: }%
8204:
8205: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
8206: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
8207: %
8208: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
8209: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
8210: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
8211: %
8212: \gdef\dofootnote{%
8213: \insert\footins\bgroup
8214: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
8215: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
8216: % So reset some parameters.
8217: \hsize=\pagewidth
8218: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
8219: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
8220: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
8221: \floatingpenalty\@MM
8222: \leftskip\z@skip
8223: \rightskip\z@skip
8224: \spaceskip\z@skip
8225: \xspaceskip\z@skip
8226: \parindent\defaultparindent
8227: %
8228: \smallfonts \rm
8229: %
8230: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
8231: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
8232: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
8233: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
8234: \let\noindent = \relax
8235: %
8236: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
8237: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
8238: \everypar = {\hang}%
8239: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
8240: %
8241: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
8242: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
8243: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
8244: \footstrut
8245: %
8246: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
8247: \futurelet\next\fo@t
8248: }
8249: }%end \catcode `\@=11
8250:
8251: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
8252: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
8253: % would be lost.
8254: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
8255: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
8256: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
8257:
8258: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
8259: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
8260: % out prematurely.
8261: %
8262: \def\startsavinginserts{%
8263: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
8264: \let\insert\saveinsert
8265: \else
8266: \let\checkinserts\relax
8267: \fi
8268: }
8269:
8270: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
8271: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
8272: %
8273: \def\saveinsert#1{%
8274: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
8275: \afterassignment\next
8276: % swallow the left brace
8277: \let\temp =
8278: }
8279: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
8280: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
8281:
8282: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
8283:
8284: \def\placesaveins#1{%
8285: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
8286: {\box#1}%
8287: }
8288:
8289: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
8290: {
8291: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
8292: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
8293: }
8294:
8295: % initialization:
8296: \def\newsaveins #1{%
8297: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
8298: \next
8299: }
8300: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
8301: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
8302: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
8303: \checksaveins #1}%
8304: }
8305:
8306: % initialize:
8307: \let\checkinserts\empty
8308: \newsaveins\footins
8309: \newsaveins\margin
8310:
8311:
8312: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
8313: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
8314: %
8315: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
8316: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
8317: % undone and the next image would fail.
8318: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
8319: \ifeof 1 \else
8320: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
8321: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
8322: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
8323: \input epsf.tex
8324: \fi
8325: \closein 1
8326: %
8327: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
8328: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
8329: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
8330: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
8331: it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
8332: %
8333: \def\image#1{%
8334: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
8335: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
8336: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
8337: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
8338: \global\warnednoepsftrue
8339: \fi
8340: \else
8341: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
8342: \fi
8343: }
8344: %
8345: % Arguments to @image:
8346: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
8347: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
8348: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
8349: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
8350: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
8351: \newif\ifimagevmode
8352: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
8353: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
8354: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
8355: % If the image is by itself, center it.
8356: \ifvmode
8357: \imagevmodetrue
8358: \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
8359: % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
8360: \imagevmodetrue
8361: \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
8362: \fi\fi
8363: %
8364: \ifimagevmode
8365: \nobreak\medskip
8366: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
8367: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
8368: % above and below.
8369: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
8370: \nobreak
8371: \fi
8372: %
8373: % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
8374: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
8375: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
8376: % normal paragraph indentation.
8377: % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
8378: % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
8379: % eradicate the centering.
8380: \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
8381: %
8382: % Output the image.
8383: \ifpdf
8384: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
8385: \else
8386: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
8387: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
8388: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
8389: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
8390: \fi
8391: %
8392: \ifimagevmode
8393: \medskip % space after a standalone image
8394: \fi
8395: \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
8396: \endgroup}
8397:
8398:
8399: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
8400: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
8401: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
8402: %
8403: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
8404:
8405: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
8406: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
8407:
8408: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
8409: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
8410: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
8411: %
8412: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
8413: % be referable.
8414: %
8415: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
8416: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
8417: %
8418: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
8419: % chapter-level command.
8420: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
8421: %
8422: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
8423: \let\thiscaption=\empty
8424: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
8425: %
8426: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
8427: %
8428: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
8429: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
8430: %
8431: \startsavinginserts
8432: %
8433: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
8434: \par
8435: %
8436: \vtop\bgroup
8437: \def\floattype{#1}%
8438: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
8439: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
8440: %
8441: \ifx\floattype\empty
8442: \let\safefloattype=\empty
8443: \else
8444: {%
8445: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8446: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8447: \indexnofonts
8448: \turnoffactive
8449: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8450: }%
8451: \fi
8452: %
8453: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
8454: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8455: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
8456: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
8457: %
8458: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
8459: \global\advance\floatno by 1
8460: %
8461: {%
8462: % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
8463: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
8464: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
8465: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
8466: % lists of floats.
8467: %
8468: \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
8469: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
8470: }%
8471: \fi
8472: %
8473: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
8474: \vskip\parskip
8475: %
8476: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
8477: \restorefirstparagraphindent
8478: }
8479:
8480: % we have these possibilities:
8481: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
8482: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
8483: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
8484: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
8485: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
8486: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
8487: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
8488: % @float & no caption:
8489: %
8490: \def\Efloat{%
8491: \let\floatident = \empty
8492: %
8493: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
8494: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
8495: %
8496: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
8497: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8498: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
8499: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
8500: \fi
8501: % the number.
8502: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8503: \fi
8504: %
8505: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
8506: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
8507: \let\captionline = \floatident
8508: %
8509: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
8510: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
8511: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
8512: \fi
8513: %
8514: % caption text.
8515: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
8516: \fi
8517: %
8518: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
8519: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
8520: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
8521: \vskip.5\parskip
8522: \captionline
8523: %
8524: % Space below caption.
8525: \vskip\parskip
8526: \fi
8527: %
8528: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
8529: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
8530: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8531: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
8532: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
8533: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
8534: {%
8535: \atdummies
8536: %
8537: % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
8538: % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
8539: % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
8540: \scanexp{%
8541: \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
8542: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
8543: \thiscaption
8544: \else
8545: \thisshortcaption
8546: \fi
8547: }%
8548: }%
8549: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
8550: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
8551: }%
8552: \fi
8553: \egroup % end of \vtop
8554: %
8555: % place the captured inserts
8556: %
8557: % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
8558: % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
8559: % float. --kasal, 26may04
8560: %
8561: \checkinserts
8562: }
8563:
8564: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
8565: %
8566: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
8567: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
8568: }
8569:
8570: % @caption, @shortcaption
8571: %
8572: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
8573: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
8574: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
8575: \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
8576:
8577: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
8578: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
8579: \def\getfloatno#1{%
8580: \ifx#1\relax
8581: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
8582: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
8583: %
8584: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
8585: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
8586: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
8587: \fi
8588: \let\floatno#1%
8589: }
8590:
8591: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
8592: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
8593: % first read the @float command.
8594: %
8595: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8596:
8597: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
8598: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
8599: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
8600:
8601: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
8602: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
8603: % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
8604: %
8605: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
8606: %
8607: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
8608: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
8609: %
8610: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
8611: \def\temp{#1}%
8612: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
8613: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
8614: }
8615:
8616: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
8617: %
8618: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
8619: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
8620: {%
8621: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8622: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8623: \indexnofonts
8624: \turnoffactive
8625: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8626: }%
8627: %
8628: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
8629: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
8630: \ifhavexrefs
8631: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
8632: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
8633: \fi
8634: \else
8635: \begingroup
8636: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
8637: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
8638: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
8639: \endgroup
8640: \fi
8641: }
8642:
8643: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
8644: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
8645: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
8646: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
8647: %
8648: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
8649: % they won't appear in the aux file).
8650: %
8651: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
8652: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
8653: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
8654: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
8655: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
8656: % in pdf output.
8657: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
8658: %
8659: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
8660: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
8661: \writeentry
8662: }}
8663:
8664:
8665: \message{localization,}
8666:
8667: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
8668: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
8669: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
8670: %
8671: {
8672: \catcode`\_ = \active
8673: \globaldefs=1
8674: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
8675: \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
8676: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
8677: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
8678: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8679: \ifeof 1
8680: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
8681: \else
8682: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8683: \input txi-#1.tex
8684: \fi
8685: \closein 1
8686: \endgroup % end raw TeX
8687: \endgroup}
8688: %
8689: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
8690: % try txi-de.tex.
8691: %
8692: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
8693: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8694: \ifeof 1
8695: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
8696: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
8697: \else
8698: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8699: \input txi-#1.tex
8700: \fi
8701: \closein 1
8702: }
8703: }% end of special _ catcode
8704: %
8705: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
8706: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
8707: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
8708:
8709: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
8710: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
8711: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
8712: %
8713: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
8714: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
8715: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
8716: %
8717: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
8718: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
8719: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
8720: % accented characters problem.)
8721: %
8722: \catcode`@=11
8723: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
8724: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
8725: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
8726: \message{no patterns for #1}%
8727: \else
8728: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
8729: \fi
8730: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
8731: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
8732: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
8733: }
8734:
8735: % Helpers for encodings.
8736: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
8737: %
8738: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
8739: \count255=128
8740: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8741: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
8742: \advance\count255 by 1
8743: \repeat
8744: }
8745:
8746: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
8747: \count255=128
8748: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8749: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
8750: \advance\count255 by 1
8751: \repeat
8752: }
8753:
8754: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
8755: % according to the specified encoding.
8756: %
8757: \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
8758: % Encoding being declared for the document.
8759: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
8760: %
8761: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
8762: % to compare them with \ifx.
8763: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
8764: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
8765: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
8766: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
8767: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
8768: %
8769: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
8770: \asciichardefs
8771: %
8772: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
8773: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8774: \lattwochardefs
8775: %
8776: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
8777: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8778: \latonechardefs
8779: %
8780: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
8781: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8782: \latninechardefs
8783: %
8784: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
8785: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8786: \utfeightchardefs
8787: %
8788: \else
8789: \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
8790: %
8791: \fi % utfeight
8792: \fi % latnine
8793: \fi % latone
8794: \fi % lattwo
8795: \fi % ascii
8796: }
8797:
8798: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
8799: % the default font encoding (OT1).
8800: %
8801: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
8802:
8803: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
8804: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
8805:
8806: % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
8807: % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
8808: % macros containing the character definitions.
8809: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8810: %
8811: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
8812: \def\latonechardefs{%
8813: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
8814: \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
8815: \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
8816: \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
8817: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8818: \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
8819: \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
8820: \gdef^^a7{\S}
8821: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8822: \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
8823: \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
8824: \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
8825: \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
8826: \gdef^^ad{\-}
8827: \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
8828: \gdef^^af{\={}}
8829: %
8830: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8831: \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
8832: \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
8833: \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
8834: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8835: \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
8836: \gdef^^b6{\P}
8837: %
8838: \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
8839: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8840: \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
8841: \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
8842: %
8843: \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
8844: \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
8845: \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
8846: \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
8847: \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
8848: %
8849: \gdef^^c0{\`A}
8850: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
8851: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
8852: \gdef^^c3{\~A}
8853: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
8854: \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
8855: \gdef^^c6{\AE}
8856: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8857: \gdef^^c8{\`E}
8858: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
8859: \gdef^^ca{\^E}
8860: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
8861: \gdef^^cc{\`I}
8862: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
8863: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
8864: \gdef^^cf{\"I}
8865: %
8866: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
8867: \gdef^^d1{\~N}
8868: \gdef^^d2{\`O}
8869: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
8870: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
8871: \gdef^^d5{\~O}
8872: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
8873: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
8874: \gdef^^d8{\O}
8875: \gdef^^d9{\`U}
8876: \gdef^^da{\'U}
8877: \gdef^^db{\^U}
8878: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
8879: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
8880: \gdef^^de{\TH}
8881: \gdef^^df{\ss}
8882: %
8883: \gdef^^e0{\`a}
8884: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
8885: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
8886: \gdef^^e3{\~a}
8887: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
8888: \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
8889: \gdef^^e6{\ae}
8890: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
8891: \gdef^^e8{\`e}
8892: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
8893: \gdef^^ea{\^e}
8894: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
8895: \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
8896: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
8897: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
8898: \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
8899: %
8900: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
8901: \gdef^^f1{\~n}
8902: \gdef^^f2{\`o}
8903: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
8904: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
8905: \gdef^^f5{\~o}
8906: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
8907: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
8908: \gdef^^f8{\o}
8909: \gdef^^f9{\`u}
8910: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
8911: \gdef^^fb{\^u}
8912: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
8913: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
8914: \gdef^^fe{\th}
8915: \gdef^^ff{\"y}
8916: }
8917:
8918: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
8919: \def\latninechardefs{%
8920: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
8921: \latonechardefs
8922: %
8923: \gdef^^a4{\euro}
8924: \gdef^^a6{\v S}
8925: \gdef^^a8{\v s}
8926: \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
8927: \gdef^^b8{\v z}
8928: \gdef^^bc{\OE}
8929: \gdef^^bd{\oe}
8930: \gdef^^be{\"Y}
8931: }
8932:
8933: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
8934: \def\lattwochardefs{%
8935: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
8936: \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
8937: \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
8938: \gdef^^a3{\L}
8939: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8940: \gdef^^a5{\v L}
8941: \gdef^^a6{\'S}
8942: \gdef^^a7{\S}
8943: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8944: \gdef^^a9{\v S}
8945: \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
8946: \gdef^^ab{\v T}
8947: \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
8948: \gdef^^ad{\-}
8949: \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
8950: \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
8951: %
8952: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8953: \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
8954: \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
8955: \gdef^^b3{\l}
8956: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8957: \gdef^^b5{\v l}
8958: \gdef^^b6{\'s}
8959: \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
8960: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8961: \gdef^^b9{\v s}
8962: \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
8963: \gdef^^bb{\v t}
8964: \gdef^^bc{\'z}
8965: \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
8966: \gdef^^be{\v z}
8967: \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
8968: %
8969: \gdef^^c0{\'R}
8970: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
8971: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
8972: \gdef^^c3{\u A}
8973: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
8974: \gdef^^c5{\'L}
8975: \gdef^^c6{\'C}
8976: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8977: \gdef^^c8{\v C}
8978: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
8979: \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
8980: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
8981: \gdef^^cc{\v E}
8982: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
8983: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
8984: \gdef^^cf{\v D}
8985: %
8986: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
8987: \gdef^^d1{\'N}
8988: \gdef^^d2{\v N}
8989: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
8990: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
8991: \gdef^^d5{\H O}
8992: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
8993: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
8994: \gdef^^d8{\v R}
8995: \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
8996: \gdef^^da{\'U}
8997: \gdef^^db{\H U}
8998: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
8999: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
9000: \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
9001: \gdef^^df{\ss}
9002: %
9003: \gdef^^e0{\'r}
9004: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
9005: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
9006: \gdef^^e3{\u a}
9007: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
9008: \gdef^^e5{\'l}
9009: \gdef^^e6{\'c}
9010: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
9011: \gdef^^e8{\v c}
9012: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
9013: \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
9014: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
9015: \gdef^^ec{\v e}
9016: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9017: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9018: \gdef^^ef{\v d}
9019: %
9020: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
9021: \gdef^^f1{\'n}
9022: \gdef^^f2{\v n}
9023: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
9024: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
9025: \gdef^^f5{\H o}
9026: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
9027: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
9028: \gdef^^f8{\v r}
9029: \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
9030: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
9031: \gdef^^fb{\H u}
9032: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
9033: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
9034: \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
9035: \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
9036: }
9037:
9038: % UTF-8 character definitions.
9039: %
9040: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
9041: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
9042: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
9043: %
9044: \newcount\countUTFx
9045: \newcount\countUTFy
9046: \newcount\countUTFz
9047:
9048: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
9049: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
9050: %
9051: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
9052: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
9053: %
9054: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
9055: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
9056:
9057: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
9058: \ifx #1\relax
9059: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
9060: \else
9061: \expandafter #1%
9062: \fi
9063: }
9064:
9065: \begingroup
9066: \catcode`\~13
9067: \catcode`\"12
9068:
9069: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
9070: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
9071: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
9072: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
9073: \advance\countUTFx by 1
9074: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
9075: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
9076: \fi}
9077:
9078: \countUTFx = "C2
9079: \countUTFy = "E0
9080: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9081: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
9082: \UTFviiiLoop
9083:
9084: \countUTFx = "E0
9085: \countUTFy = "F0
9086: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9087: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
9088: \UTFviiiLoop
9089:
9090: \countUTFx = "F0
9091: \countUTFy = "F4
9092: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9093: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
9094: \UTFviiiLoop
9095: \endgroup
9096:
9097: \begingroup
9098: \catcode`\"=12
9099: \catcode`\<=12
9100: \catcode`\.=12
9101: \catcode`\,=12
9102: \catcode`\;=12
9103: \catcode`\!=12
9104: \catcode`\~=13
9105:
9106: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
9107: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
9108: %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
9109: \begingroup
9110: \parseXMLCharref
9111: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
9112: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
9113: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
9114: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
9115: \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
9116: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
9117: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9118: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9119: \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
9120: \endgroup}
9121:
9122: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
9123: \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
9124: \errhelp = \EMsimple
9125: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
9126: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
9127: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9128: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
9129: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
9130: \parseUTFviiiA;%
9131: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9132: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
9133: \else
9134: \parseUTFviiiA;%
9135: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9136: \parseUTFviiiA!%
9137: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
9138: \fi\fi\fi
9139: }
9140:
9141: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
9142: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
9143: \divide\countUTFz by 64
9144: \countUTFy = \countUTFz
9145: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
9146: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
9147: \advance\countUTFx by 128
9148: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
9149: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
9150:
9151: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
9152: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
9153: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
9154: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
9155: \endgroup
9156:
9157: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
9158: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
9159: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
9160: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
9161: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
9162: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
9163: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
9164: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
9165: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
9166: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
9167: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
9168:
9169: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
9170: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
9171: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
9172: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
9173: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
9174: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
9175:
9176: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
9177: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
9178: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
9179: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
9180: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
9181: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
9182: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
9183: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
9184: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
9185: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
9186: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
9187: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
9188: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
9189: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
9190: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
9191: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
9192:
9193: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
9194: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
9195: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
9196: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
9197: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
9198: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
9199: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
9200: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
9201: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
9202: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
9203: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
9204: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
9205: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
9206: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
9207: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
9208:
9209: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
9210: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
9211: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
9212: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
9213: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
9214: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
9215: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
9216: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
9217: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
9218: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
9219: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
9220: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
9221: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
9222: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9223: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9224: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
9225:
9226: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
9227: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
9228: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
9229: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
9230: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
9231: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
9232: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
9233: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
9234: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
9235: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
9236: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
9237: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
9238: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
9239: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
9240: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
9241:
9242: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
9243: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
9244: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
9245: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
9246: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
9247: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
9248: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
9249: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
9250: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
9251: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
9252: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
9253: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
9254: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
9255: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
9256: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
9257: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
9258: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
9259:
9260: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
9261: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
9262: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
9263: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
9264: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
9265: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
9266: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
9267: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
9268: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
9269: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
9270: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
9271: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
9272:
9273: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
9274: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
9275: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
9276: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
9277: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
9278: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
9279: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
9280: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
9281: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
9282: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
9283:
9284: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
9285: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
9286: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
9287: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
9288: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
9289: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
9290: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
9291: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
9292:
9293: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
9294: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
9295: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
9296: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
9297: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
9298: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
9299: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
9300: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
9301: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
9302: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
9303:
9304: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
9305: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
9306: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
9307: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
9308: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
9309: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
9310: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
9311: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
9312: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
9313: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
9314: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
9315: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
9316: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
9317: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
9318:
9319: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
9320: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
9321: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
9322: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
9323: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
9324:
9325: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
9326: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
9327: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
9328: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
9329: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
9330: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
9331: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
9332: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
9333:
9334: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
9335: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
9336: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
9337: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
9338: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
9339: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
9340: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
9341: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
9342: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
9343: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
9344: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
9345: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
9346: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
9347:
9348: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
9349: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
9350: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
9351: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
9352: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
9353: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
9354: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
9355: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
9356: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
9357: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
9358: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
9359: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
9360:
9361: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
9362: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
9363: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
9364: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
9365: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
9366:
9367: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
9368: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
9369: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
9370: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
9371: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
9372: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
9373:
9374: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
9375: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
9376: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
9377: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
9378: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
9379: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
9380: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
9381: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
9382: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
9383: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
9384: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
9385: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
9386:
9387: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
9388: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
9389:
9390: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
9391: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
9392: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
9393: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
9394: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
9395: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
9396:
9397: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
9398: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
9399: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
9400:
9401: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
9402:
9403: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
9404: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
9405: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
9406: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
9407: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
9408: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
9409: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
9410: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
9411: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
9412: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
9413: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
9414: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
9415:
9416: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
9417: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
9418:
9419: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
9420: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
9421: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
9422: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
9423: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
9424: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
9425: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
9426: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
9427:
9428: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
9429: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
9430: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
9431: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
9432: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
9433: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
9434: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
9435: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
9436: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
9437: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
9438: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
9439: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
9440:
9441: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
9442: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
9443: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
9444: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
9445: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
9446: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
9447: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
9448: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
9449: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
9450: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
9451:
9452: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
9453: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
9454: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
9455: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
9456: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
9457: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
9458: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
9459: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
9460: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
9461: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
9462:
9463: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
9464: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
9465: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
9466: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
9467: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
9468: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
9469: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
9470: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
9471: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
9472: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
9473:
9474: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
9475: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
9476: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
9477: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
9478:
9479: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
9480: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
9481: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
9482: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
9483: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
9484: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
9485: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
9486: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
9487: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
9488: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
9489: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
9490: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
9491: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
9492: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
9493: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
9494: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
9495:
9496: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
9497: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
9498: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
9499: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
9500: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
9501: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
9502: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
9503: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
9504: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
9505: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
9506:
9507: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
9508: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
9509:
9510: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
9511: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
9512: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
9513: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
9514:
9515: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
9516: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
9517: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
9518: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
9519:
9520: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
9521: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
9522:
9523: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
9524: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
9525: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
9526:
9527: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
9528: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
9529:
9530: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
9531: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
9532: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
9533: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
9534: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
9535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
9536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
9537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
9538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
9539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
9540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
9541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
9542: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
9543:
9544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
9545: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
9546:
9547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
9548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
9549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
9550: }% end of \utfeightchardefs
9551:
9552:
9553: % US-ASCII character definitions.
9554: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
9555: \relax
9556: }
9557:
9558: % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
9559: % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
9560: % document encoding.
9561: %
9562: \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
9563:
9564:
9565: \message{formatting,}
9566:
9567: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
9568:
9569: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
9570: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
9571: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
9572:
9573: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
9574: \vbadness = 10000
9575:
9576: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
9577: \hbadness = 6666
9578:
9579: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
9580: \widowpenalty=10000
9581: \clubpenalty=10000
9582:
9583: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
9584: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
9585: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
9586: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
9587: %
9588: \def\setemergencystretch{%
9589: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
9590: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
9591: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
9592: \else
9593: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
9594: \fi
9595: }
9596:
9597: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
9598: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
9599: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
9600: %
9601: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
9602: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
9603: %
9604: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
9605: \voffset = #3\relax
9606: \topskip = #6\relax
9607: \splittopskip = \topskip
9608: %
9609: \vsize = #1\relax
9610: \advance\vsize by \topskip
9611: \outervsize = \vsize
9612: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
9613: \pageheight = \vsize
9614: %
9615: \hsize = #2\relax
9616: \outerhsize = \hsize
9617: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
9618: \pagewidth = \hsize
9619: %
9620: \normaloffset = #4\relax
9621: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
9622: %
9623: \ifpdf
9624: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
9625: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
9626: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
9627: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
9628: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
9629: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
9630: \fi
9631: %
9632: \setleading{\textleading}
9633: %
9634: \parindent = \defaultparindent
9635: \setemergencystretch
9636: }
9637:
9638: % @letterpaper (the default).
9639: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9640: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9641: \textleading = 13.2pt
9642: %
9643: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
9644: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
9645: {\voffset}{.25in}%
9646: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
9647: {11in}{8.5in}%
9648: }}
9649:
9650: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
9651: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9652: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
9653: \textleading = 12pt
9654: %
9655: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
9656: {-.2in}{0in}%
9657: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
9658: {9.25in}{7in}%
9659: %
9660: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
9661: \tolerance = 700
9662: \hfuzz = 1pt
9663: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9664: \defbodyindent = .5cm
9665: }}
9666:
9667: % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
9668: % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
9669: \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9670: \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
9671: \textleading = 12pt
9672: %
9673: \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
9674: {-.2in}{-.4in}%
9675: {0pt}{14pt}%
9676: {9in}{6in}%
9677: %
9678: \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
9679: \tolerance = 700
9680: \hfuzz = 1pt
9681: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9682: \defbodyindent = .4cm
9683: }}
9684:
9685: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
9686: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9687: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9688: \textleading = 13.2pt
9689: %
9690: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
9691: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
9692: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
9693: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
9694: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
9695: % your texinfo source file like this:
9696: % @tex
9697: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
9698: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
9699: % @end tex
9700: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
9701: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9702: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9703: {297mm}{210mm}%
9704: %
9705: \tolerance = 700
9706: \hfuzz = 1pt
9707: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9708: \defbodyindent = 5mm
9709: }}
9710:
9711: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
9712: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
9713: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
9714: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9715: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
9716: \textleading = 12.5pt
9717: %
9718: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
9719: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9720: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
9721: {210mm}{148mm}%
9722: %
9723: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
9724: \tolerance = 800
9725: \hfuzz = 1.2pt
9726: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9727: \defbodyindent = 2mm
9728: \tableindent = 12mm
9729: }}
9730:
9731: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
9732: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
9733: \afourpaper
9734: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
9735: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
9736: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9737: {297mm}{210mm}%
9738: %
9739: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
9740: \globaldefs = 0
9741: }}
9742:
9743: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
9744: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
9745: \afourpaper
9746: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
9747: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
9748: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9749: {297mm}{210mm}%
9750: \globaldefs = 0
9751: }}
9752:
9753: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
9754: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
9755: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
9756: %
9757: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
9758: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
9759: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
9760: \globaldefs = 1
9761: %
9762: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9763: \setleading{\textleading}%
9764: %
9765: \dimen0 = #1\relax
9766: \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
9767: %
9768: \dimen2 = \hsize
9769: \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
9770: %
9771: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
9772: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
9773: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9774: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
9775: }}
9776:
9777: % Set default to letter.
9778: %
9779: \letterpaper
9780:
9781:
9782: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
9783:
9784: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
9785:
9786: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
9787: \catcode`\^^? = 14
9788:
9789: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
9790: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
9791: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
9792: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
9793: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
9794: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
9795: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
9796: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
9797: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
9798: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
9799:
9800: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
9801: % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
9802: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
9803: %
9804: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
9805: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
9806: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
9807: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
9808: %
9809: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9810:
9811: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
9812: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
9813: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
9814: % this is not a problem.
9815: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9816:
9817: % Turn off all special characters except @
9818: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
9819: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
9820: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
9821:
9822: \catcode`\"=\active
9823: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
9824: \let"=\activedoublequote
9825: \catcode`\~=\active
9826: \def~{{\tt\char126}}
9827: \chardef\hat=`\^
9828: \catcode`\^=\active
9829: \def^{{\tt \hat}}
9830:
9831: \catcode`\_=\active
9832: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
9833: \let\realunder=_
9834: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
9835: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
9836:
9837: \catcode`\|=\active
9838: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
9839: \chardef \less=`\<
9840: \catcode`\<=\active
9841: \def<{{\tt \less}}
9842: \chardef \gtr=`\>
9843: \catcode`\>=\active
9844: \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
9845: \catcode`\+=\active
9846: \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
9847: \catcode`\$=\active
9848: \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
9849:
9850: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
9851: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
9852: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
9853: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
9854: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
9855:
9856: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
9857: % parsing them.
9858: \def\turnoffactive{%
9859: \normalturnoffactive
9860: \otherbackslash
9861: }
9862:
9863: \catcode`\@=0
9864:
9865: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
9866: % as in \char`\\.
9867: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
9868: \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
9869:
9870: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
9871: % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
9872: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
9873:
9874: % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
9875: % in fixed width font.
9876: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
9877:
9878: % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
9879: % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
9880: % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
9881: % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
9882: % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
9883: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
9884: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
9885: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
9886: @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
9887: @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
9888:
9889: % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
9890: % @let \ = @normalbackslash
9891: % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
9892: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
9893: % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
9894: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
9895: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
9896:
9897: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
9898: % the literal character `\'.
9899: %
9900: @def@normalturnoffactive{%
9901: @let"=@normaldoublequote
9902: @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
9903: @let+=@normalplus
9904: @let<=@normalless
9905: @let>=@normalgreater
9906: @let\=@normalbackslash
9907: @let^=@normalcaret
9908: @let_=@normalunderscore
9909: @let|=@normalverticalbar
9910: @let~=@normaltilde
9911: @markupsetuplqdefault
9912: @markupsetuprqdefault
9913: @unsepspaces
9914: }
9915:
9916: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
9917: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
9918: @otherifyactive
9919:
9920: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
9921: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
9922: % a backslash.
9923: %
9924: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
9925: @global@let\ = @eatinput
9926:
9927: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
9928: % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
9929: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
9930: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
9931: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
9932: %
9933: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
9934: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
9935: @catcode`+=@active
9936: @catcode`@_=@active
9937: }
9938:
9939: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
9940: @escapechar = `@@
9941:
9942: % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
9943: % active definitions as the normal characters.
9944: @def@normaldot{.}
9945: @def@normalquest{?}
9946: @def@normalslash{/}
9947:
9948: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
9949: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
9950: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
9951: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
9952: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
9953:
9954: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
9955:
9956: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
9957: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
9958: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
9959: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
9960: @catcode`@'=@active
9961: @catcode`@`=@active
9962: @markupsetuplqdefault
9963: @markupsetuprqdefault
9964:
9965: @c Local variables:
9966: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
9967: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
9968: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
9969: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
9970: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
9971: @c End:
9972:
9973: @c vim:sw=2:
9974:
9975: @ignore
9976: arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
9977: @end ignore
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/icons/cvsweb/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/icons/cvsweb/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/icons/cvsweb/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [ELWIX - Embedded LightWeight unIX -] / embedaddon / quagga / doc